Unit 22 重、难点的讲解(人教版高一英语下册教案教学设计)（精选19篇）由网友“kamocom”投稿提供，下面是小编整理过的Unit 22 重、难点的讲解(人教版高一英语下册教案教学设计)，欢迎您能喜欢，也请多多分享。
篇1：Unit 14 Festivals教学重、难点讲解(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)
1．Compare a Chinese festival with a festival from another country.
把中国的一个节日同另一个国家的节日进行比较。
①compare…with…把……与……相比。如：
It is necessary to compare English with Chinese in English study.
学英语时有必要把英语和汉语进行比较。
②compare A to B除表达“把A和B做比较外”，更常表达“把A比作B，把A比喻成B”。如：
Shakespeare compared the world to a stage.
莎士比亚把世界比作一个大舞台。
注意：compared to和compared with通常可以通用，用作句子状语，可以放在句首，也可放在句末，意为“与……相比”，“与……比起来”。如：
It was a small place then compared to/with what it is now.
和现在比起来，那时它还是一个小地方。
Compared to/with many people, she was indeed lucky.
和许多人相比，她确实幸运。
2．If you don’t know of any festivals from other countries, you can ask your teacher for ideas.
如果你不了解他国的任何节日，可以向老师请教。
①know of意为“听说过，知道有”，指间接从别人那里听说而了解到，后接人时只表示知道有这个人的存在。
know意为“认识、知道”，指认识某人，知道有事，是对某人、某事直接的了解和认识，后接人时表示认识此人。
know about也可表达间接地了解或知道，意为“了解”，“知道……的情况”。后接人时表示了解此人。如：
To know everything is to know nothing.样样通，样样松。
I know of a shop where you can get things like that.
我知道有一家商店可以买到这类东西。
I happened to know about him.我正好了解他的一些情况。
②ask sb. for…请求某人做某事，向某人要某物。如：
You can ask me for help whenever necessary.
不论何时需要，你都可以向我求助。
The little child is always asking his father for money.
那小孩总不断地向他父亲要钱。
注意：ask for sth.意为“要得到某物；ask for sb.意为“找某人，要见某人”。如：
He sat down and asked for a cup of coffee.
他坐下来要了一杯咖啡。
Somebody is asking for you.有人要见你。
3．People celebrate Mardi Gras by dressing up in costumes.
人们穿上盛装，庆祝油腻的礼拜二。
①dress up穿上盛装，打扮。如：
You don’t need to dress up for this dinner.
这次去吃饭你不必穿正式的服装。
I don’t want to go to their wedding because I hate dressing up.
我不想去参加他们的婚礼，因为我讨厌打扮。
dress up后面接in，表示“穿……服装打扮”；接as，表示“打扮成……”。例如：
I just love the fun of dressing up in ancient clothing.
我只是喜欢穿古装的那种情趣。
The little girl dressed herself up as an angle.
这个小女孩打扮成一个天使。
另外，我们常用be dressed in表示“穿……”。例如：
She is always dressed in white.
她总是穿白色的服装。
②celebrate与congratulate的辨析
celebrate表达“庆祝、祝贺”之意，限于用事，如节日、胜利、结婚纪念、生日等。是指以仪式、典礼等活动庆祝令人欢乐的事或日子。
congratulate指对人进行祝贺，常构成短语congratulate sb. on sth.表达“为某事而祝贺某人”。
4．Kwanzaa is a seven-day festival celebrating the culture and history of African-Americans.
Kwanzaa是一个七天的节日，庆祝非裔美国人的文化历史。
①seven-day是一个复合词，起形容词作用。注意day不用复数。又如：
the tenth five-year plan第十个五年计划；
a two-hour drive开车两小时
②句中的celebrating…是现在分词短语，作后置定语，其意思相当于which celebrates…类似结构的句子在文章中还有，如：The week following Christmas Day.
5．…，many African-American families get together to greet the new year and think about the past.
…，很多非裔的美国家庭聚集在一起迎接新年，回味过去的岁月。
get together常指非正式地“聚会；联欢”，不及物动词短语，后面可接动词不定式或相应的介词短语作状语。例如：
It’s a long time since I got together with her.
我好久没有和她见面了。
The students of these four classes got together for an English evening.
这四个班的学生在一起开了一次英语晚会。
6．The African first fruit festivals had many things in common.
非洲人最初的收获节有许多共同之处。
in common意为“共有的”、“共同的”，通常用于构成以下短语：
have…in common(with…)和某人有……共同之处
in common with…和……一样。如：
They found they had a lot in common and got on well.
他们两人发现有很多共同之处，说得很投机。
In common with many other boys, he is into computer games.
同很多其他男孩一样，他迷恋电脑游戏。
注意：在have…in common with…结构中，have之后可用表程度的代词，如：something, nothing, a lot, a little, little等。例如：
I have nothing in common with you.
我与你没有一点共同之处。
7．People would get together to celebrate their harvest; they used to give thanks for their harvests and for life…
人们聚会欢庆收获，对收成和人生表示感恩，……
would是情态动词，表示“过去常常……”常与often, frequently, sometimes, for hours等连用。如：
When I was a child, I would often go skiing.
我小时候常去滑雪。
used to与would的辨析
used to表过去持续的状态或情况，客观地陈述相当期间的规则行为。其含义是现在动作或习惯已不存在，不能与表一段时间的状语连用，但可跟状态性动词。
would表过去不大规则的行为，常与often, sometimes, frequently, for hours等词连用，但不与表状态的动词连用。如：
He used to be a worker.（√）
He would be a worker.（×）
There used to be an old temple on the hill.( 从前山上有座庙。)
She would sit there for hours doing nothing at all.
她总是一连几个小时坐在那儿，什么也不做。
8．The festivals were a way to celebrate history and culture, as well as the new year.
这些节日是纪念历史文化的方式和庆祝新年的一种方法。
①注意句中的history, culture前不用冠词。一般来说，表示概念性或学科性的抽象名词前不用冠词。但如果带有限制性的后置修饰成分，应该使用定冠词。
比较：American history和the history of America.
②as well as表示“与……一样好”，其中的well是副词。此处是并列连词，意思是“不但……而且”。as well as后可以跟名词、代词、形容词、介词和从句等。当其并列两个主语时，谓语动词与前者保持人称和数的一致。例如：
The girl is lively as well as healthy.（连接两个表语）
这女孩既健康又活泼。
He wants a pen as well as a pencil.（连接两个宾语）
The teacher as well as all the students enjoys English classes.（连接两个主语）
9．We have to build our own lives, think for ourselves and speak for ourselves.
我们必须创建自己的生活，为我们自己而思考，为我们自己而宣传。
for oneself意思为“亲自、独自”“为自己”。
oneself可和不同介词搭配构成不同短语：
by oneself= alone独自地、单独地
of oneself自动地
in oneself本身，本来
to oneself专对，专为……单独所有
come to oneself苏醒，恢复意识
be oneself身体/头脑正常，行动自然
10．We must do as much as we can to make our community better and more beautiful.
我们必须尽力使我们的社区更好、更美丽。
as…as we can是一个比较状语从句，意思为“尽可能 ，尽力”，相当于as…as possible, to make our community better and more beautiful是不定式短语，在句中作目的状语。
注意：情态动词can, could和不定式不属于同一个意群。由例句可以看出，不定式为主句的一部分，作目的状语；而can, could为状语从句谓语动词的一部分，其后已承前省略了动词原形，所以不要再把can, could与不定式混同为“情态动词后接动词原形”。如：
I’ll do as much as I can to help him.我将尽我所能来帮助他。
（can之后已省略动词原形do，to help him作目的状语）
11．We should believe in our family, our people, our teachers and our leaders.
我们应该信任我们的家人，我们的人民，我们的老师，以及我们的领导。
believe in常见的有三种含义：
①信任（某人）He is an honest man . I believe in him.
②信仰I believe in God.我信仰上帝。
③相信……的价值或用处He believes in getting plenty of exercise.
他相信多做运动必有好处。
12．Creating a new festival may seem an unusual way to celebrate history and culture, but we are in fact all creating new festivals every year.
创立一个新节日，也许看起来像一种不同寻常的庆祝历史和文化的方式，但实际上我们每年都在创立新的节日。
creating a new festival为动名词短语，在句中作主语。动名词短语同不定式、从句一样，在句中作主语时，谓语动词使用单数形式。
13．Each time we celebrate a festival it changes a little……
每次庆祝节日都会有一点儿变化，……
each time在这里是名词短语作连词，引导一个时间状语从句。再如：
Each time I saw him, he was busy with his work.
14．Many festivals around the world are celebrated around the same time.
世界上许多节日大约都在同一时间庆祝。
注意：第一个around相当于in，第二个around相当于at about
15．Our ancestor celebrated the birth of a son or a daughter by giving away red eggs.
give away在这里的意思为“赠送”“捐献”。它还可作“分发（奖品）”；“失去或错过（机会）”；“泄露”如：
He has given away all his money to the beggar.
他把所有的钱都送给乞丐了。
It is said that the headmaster will give away the prizes to the sportsmen.
据说校长将给运动员颁奖。
He gave away the chance of going abroad because of his sick wife.
因为他生病的妻子，他放弃了出国的机会。
16．The festival celebrates both the living and the dead.
这节日既庆祝生者也颂死者。
the living意为“活着的人们”，the dead意为“死去的人们”，两者均属于“the +形容词”表一类人，是一个复数概念。在句中作主语时，谓语动词应用复数形式。如：
The sick are being taken good care of.病人得到精心的护理。
The old老年人
17．It is not a sad day, but rather a time to celebrate the cycle of life.
这不是悲伤的日子，而是一个庆祝生命轮回的时刻。
not…but…意为“不是……，而是……”，句中连接两个表语。not…but…连接两个平行成分，当连接两个主语时，谓语动词的数按“就近原则”。
Not he but you are wanted on the telephone.来电话找的是你不是他。
He does not work but play all day.
I am not a student but a teacher.
18．Our friends will play tricks on us and try to fool us, If a person takes in, he or she is called “April Fool!”
我们的朋友就会捉弄我们，试图骗过我们。只要一个人中了圈套，他或她就被叫做“愚人”。
①play a trick on sb.或play tricks on sb.意为“捉弄某人，开某人玩笑”
It is acceptable to play tricks on your friends on April 1st.
四月一日那天，同朋友们开玩笑是可以接受的。
②take in在此处作“欺骗”解。如：
Don’t let yourself be taken in by his tricks.
不要让他的花招蒙骗了你。
She is ready to believe others so she is easy to take in.
她轻易就相信别人的话所以她容易上当。
篇2：Unit 16 重点难点讲解(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)
1．Why should students be careful smelling from bottles?
为什么学生在闻瓶中气味时要当心？
be careful doing的意思是“做某事仔细或小心”，be careful后面常跟with，in，about等介词短语，也可跟to do或从句。例如：
People should be more careful about the things they say.
大家对自己说的话应该很谨慎。
Be careful that the medicine is kept away from children.
要小心把药放在安全的地方，不要让小孩拿到。
Please be very careful with those plates! 那些盘子，要十分小心。
2．What is to be done when anything gets into your eyes?
如果你眼睛里进了东西，该怎么办？
①“be+ to do”结构表示安排、命令、职责、义务、目的、用途、可能性、命中注定等。例如：
We are to meet at the school gate. 我们约定在校门口碰头。（安排）
You are to be back by 10 o’clock. 你得在10点钟前回来。（命令）
A knife is to cut with. 刀是用来切割的。（用途）
They were never to meet again.他们注定以后永远不再见面。（命中注定）
②不定式的被动式用于当逻辑主语是不定式动作的接受者。再如：
Do you want to be taught German？ 你想让人教你德语吗？
3．More roads and trains mean more pollution.
更多的路和火车意味着更多的污染。
试比较：mean to do sth. 打算干某事 mean doing sth. 意味着…
I don’t mean to argue with you. 我不打算跟你吵架。
Passing the entrance exam means being admitted into college.
通过了高考意味着被大学录取。
4．It is fast and clean and it doesn’t make any noise as planes do.
它既快又清洁而不像飞机那样制造噪音。
①make a noise 吵闹、喧哗、制造噪音。例如：
Try not to make a noise when you go upstairs.
Don’t make so much noise. 不要大声喧哗。
②as在这里作连词用，意思为“像……一样”，如：
She is a fine singer，as her mother used to.
像她妈妈过去一样，她是个很好的歌手。
5．We should make more use of this new technology.
我们应该更好地利用这种新技术。
make use of利用，use前不用冠词，但可以加上某些形容词。如：
make good use of好好利用
make full use of充分利用
make the best use of充分利用
make little use of 不充分利用
6．It is good for the economy、那对经济（发展）有好处。
be good for作“对……有好处”；“对……有益”。例如：
Milk is good for you. 牛奶对你健康有益。
It is not good for children to give them everything they want.
孩子要什么就给什么，这对他们并无益处。
比较：be good to sb.（对……友善）。例如：
This boss is good to his employees, especially when they are ill.
这位老板对他的雇员很好，尤其是当他们生病时。
be good at（擅长于）。例如：
The children is good at language study.这孩子擅长语言学习。
7．In the 18th century，Benjamin Franklin conducted a number of experiments in which he showed what electricity is.
十八世纪，本杰明弗兰克林做了一系列实验，以证明电是什么。
In June 1752，I wanted to show that lighting and electricity are the same.
1752年6月，我要证明闪电和电是一回事。
①一般来说，从句的动词时态与主句的动词时态保持一致，也就是说，如果主句中用过去时，从句一般也用过去范畴的时态。但是如果从句表达的是一种真理或客观事实，使用一般现在时。
②“做实验”的各种说法：
do an experiment
make an experiment
perform an experiment
conduct an experiment
carry out an experiment
③conduct作为及物动词，作“指导，引导；指挥（乐团、乐曲）；经营，管理”。如
He conducted me around the museum. 他领我参观了博物馆。
He conducted the orchestra. 他指挥管弦乐团。
The manager conducted his business carefully.
这个经理谨慎地管理着他的业务。
④a number of表示“很多的，大量的”，后接可数名词的复数，谓语动词用复数形式。而the number of则表示“……的数量”，谓语动词用单数形式。如：
A number of children play games online. 很多孩子在网上玩游戏。
The number of cars is increasing year by year.
骄车的数量在逐年增长。
8．Having realized that I could use a kite to attract lightning，I decided to do an experiment.
意识到我能用风筝来吸引闪电，我决定做一个实验。
having realised是现在分词的完成式，在句中作状语，表示其动作发生在主句的谓语动作之前，相当于when I had realized that…，再如：
Having answered the letter，she went on to listen to the radio.
回完了信，她开始接着听收音机。
Having been praised at the meeting，the girl felt very happy.
在会上受到了表扬，这个女孩感到非常高兴。
9．The string was getting charged. 细线开始带电！
①charge作及物动词，作“使……充满，饱含”。如：
He’s charging a battery. 他正在为蓄电池充电。
②“get+过去分词”表示“被（受）……”。get用在表示动作的动词过去分词之前表被动语态，它强调该动作和其所造成主语状态的变化。如：
He got lost in the forest. 他在森林里迷路了。
The audience got confused. 观众被搞糊涂了。
10．I was beginning to think that the experiment would not work.
当时我开始认为这项实验行不通。
①work的意思是“起作用；产生影响；行得通；奏效”。例如：
The medicine seems to be working. 药好像起作用了。
Will your method work? 你的方法行吗？
②比较begin to do与begin doing：
1）begin后跟to do或doing，含义上没有多少差异。如果谈论一个长期的习惯动作开始养成时，更加常用begin doing。例如：
How old were you when you first began playing the piano?
2）当begin后面跟的是understand，realize，see，know，think等动词时，用begin to do。例如：
She began to think she was wrong after a second thought.
经过重新考虑后，她开始认为她错了。
3）当begin用于进行时态时，其后跟to do。如：
Mary is beginning to do her homework.
4）当主语是物或用于描述天气变化时，其后跟to do如：
The water began to boil. 水开始开了。
It began to get dark before we knew it. 不知不觉地天黑下来了。
11．This experiment proves that lightning and electricity are the same.
这个实验证明闪电与电相同的。
prove作为及物动词，当“证明，证实”讲，如：
The facts prove that he is a brave fighter.（prove + that从句）
事实证明他是一个勇敢的战士。
He has proved his courage in the battle.（prove + n）
在战斗中已经证明了他的勇气。
He proved himself to be a capable general.（prove+宾语+宾补）
他证明自己是一位有能力的将军。
prove还可作系动词，后接形容词或名词作表语，意为“证明是……”。如：
The method proved（to be）effective. 这种办法证明是有效的。
He proved a successful manager. 他证明是一位成功的经理。
12．Add a tail to the frame and tie a long string to the cross so you can control the kite.
给风筝框上加上条尾巴并在中心架上系一条细线这样就能控制风筝了。
①add作为及物动词，意为“加，增加”如：
The fire is out，will you please add some wood?
火要灭了，请你添些木柴好吗？
②add…to…意为“在……放（加）……”如：
If you add some salt to the soup，it will taste better.
如果你在汤里放些盐，汤的味道会更好些。
③add to = increase增加，增添。如：
This visit will greatly add to our understanding of our country.
这次访问将大大增加我们对贵国的了解。
④add up to合计，总计。如：
His whole schooling added up to no more than one year.
他所受的学校教育加起来不到一年。
⑤tie…to…解释“把……绑在（系到）……上”。如：
The farmer tied the horse to a tree. 这个农夫把马拴在一棵树上。
13．Take care that the string does not touch the wall or the door.
注意不要让长线碰到墙壁或门。
take care常用于以下结构：
①take care of（爱护；照顾）。例如：
She urged me to take care of myself. 她力劝我保重自己。
She stayed at home to take care of the baby. 她留在家里照顾婴儿。
②take care that…（小心；注意）。例如：
Take care that you don’t spoil your clothes.
当心不要把衣服弄脏。
二、词语辨析
1．electric，electrical
这两个词都是“电的”意思。不同的是：electric指“由电产生的”或“带电的装置”；而“electrical”指“有关电学方面的”。
an electric clock/light/iron/wire
电子钟/电灯/电熨斗/电线
electrical engineering电工学
an electrical engineer 电力工程师
2．pull，draw，drag
①pull是个普通用语，意为“用力拉”，指使物体朝着发出力的方向移动，不强调移动的方式。
Mother pulled me by the hand. 妈妈拉着我的手。
Pull the door open. Don’t push it. 把门拉开，别推。
②draw与pull意思接近，通常指“拖、拉”的动作比pull更均匀、平稳，从容
Out of the package he drew a paper and gave it to my father.
他从小包里抽出一份文件递给我父亲。
After some time，he began to draw the net in.
过了一些时候，他开始收网。
③drag指艰难而缓慢地“拖、拉”较笨重的东西，含“费力和用劲”之意。
He dragged himself along the street.
他拖着沉重的脚步沿街走着。
3．be made of；be made from；be made into
be made of指成品中可以看出原材料。
be made from指在成品中看不出原材料。
be made into其主语是原料，指某种原料可以制成（某种成品）
4．high，highly
high用作形容词时，其意思是“高的”，但常引电为“强烈的；高尚的；崇高的”。high还可用作副词，其意思是“高；显著的；强烈地”。
highly也是副词，往往指抽象的高。
篇3：Unit 1 单元重难点讲解(人教版高二英语上册教案教学设计)
同步教学
一、重点单词与词组
1．undertake vt. & vi. (undertook, undertaken)
（1）着手工作[start on (work)]，担任职位（take up a position）.
He undertook a revolutionary task then.
他当时从事一项革命工作.（undertake. sth.）
He undertook a journey.
他准备旅行。（undertake sth.）
（2）承担；接受；同意；保证
We should undertake the responsibility for changes.
我们应该承担起改革的责任。（承担）
He undertook to be our guide.
他同意做我们的向导。（undertake to be …同意）
（相当于promise /agree）
He undertook to improve the working arrangements.
他答应改善工作方式。
（undertake to do sth.相当于promise /agree to do sth.）
I will undertake that all the cattle will grow well.
我保证所有的牲畜都能长得好。（undertake that…保证…）
2． curious adj.
（1）好奇的；好求知的（eager to know /learn）.
A good student should always be curious to learn.
好学生应有求知欲。（be curious to do sth）
（2）好管闲事的，爱打听隐私的（having /showing too much interest in other people's affairs）
He was so curious to know what was in the letter that he opened it; even though it was addressed to his father.
虽然，信是寄给他父亲收的，但他对信的内容十分好奇，就把它折开看了。（be curious to do sth）
（3）古怪的；奇怪的；奇特的；不寻常的（strange, unusual）
This is a curious piece of 19th century art.
这是一部稀罕的十九世纪艺术品。
派生词：curiously adv.
Curiously (enough), he seemed to know that already.
真奇怪，那件事他好像知道了。
3． branch n.（学科）分科；树枝；支流；支线；分支机构
Some birds settled on the branches of a big tree.
一些鸟栖息在一棵大树的枝头上。（树枝）
The Han River is a branch of the Changjiang River.
汉水是长江的支流。（支流）
You can find a branch road /railway in front of you.
你可在眼前发现一个道路/铁路支线。（支线）
Physics is a branch of science.
物理学是一门科学。（分科）
Our business has branches in many cities.
我们在许多城市设有分店。（分支机构）
He comes from a branch of our family that settled in America.
他来自我们定居美国的家族的一支。（分支）
相关搭配：
a Party branch 党支部
a League branch团支部
a general Party branch党总支
a branch office分局；分店
4． debate n. 辩论；争论
vt. 与……辩论；争论
vi.辩论；争论；参加辩论
There will be a long debate before the new law is passed.
新法令通过以前要先作一次长的辩论。（n.）
I debated upon /about the question with Mary.
我跟玛丽辩论这个问题。（v.）
与upon /about 连用，构成词组：
debate upon /about sth with sb或debate with sb upon /about sth.
与某人辩论某问题
They debated the question at the meeting yesterday.
昨天他们在会议上辩论了这个问题。（vt.）
另外，此词也可指心理的思想的斗争，可作“考虑，思考”讲，如：
I debated the idea in my mind until I fell asleep.
我入睡前心中一再思考这个问题。
派生词：debater n.好争辩者；精于争辩者
5． work on
（1）继续工作 例如：
They have been working on the problem these five years.
这五年来他们一直致力于解决这个问题。
（2）对……做工作，对……施加影响例如：
Work on your father until he agrees.
做做你父亲的工作，直到他同意为止。
（3）影响
A child's tears always work on his mother's feeling.
孩子的眼泪总是影响其母亲的情绪。
6． research vt. & vi.调查、研究、探索（into, on）
They researched on /into the effects of cigarette smoking.
他们研究了抽烟的影响。（research on /into sth. vi.）
We are researching a subject.
我们正在研究一个专题。（research sth. vt.）
This book has been very well researched.
这本书的研究做得很深入。（vt.）
n.（1）研究，探讨（[ U ]）
They will do some research on disease of the blood.
他们将研究血液疾病。（do research on /into sth.）
They are working on a piece of research.
他们正从事一项研究。
（2）一项研究成果（[ C ]）
They carried out a research into the causes of brain damage.
他们进行了脑伤原因的研究。
My researches were directed towards finding a cure for headaches.
我的研究目标是治头疼的方法。
7． seek vt. & vi.(sought, sought) 寻找，探索，追求（after, for）
We sought after the truth in the matter.
我们寻找事情的真相。（seek after sth.. vi.）
They were seeking among his untidy papers for the right one.
他们正在杂乱的文件堆中找寻着要的那一份。（seek…for… vi）
You could seek shelter from the rain.
你能寻找避雨之所。（seek sth vt.）
You should seek advice from your lawyer on this matter.
这件事情你应该请教你的律师。（请求，要求）
They sought to punish him for his crime but he escaped.
他们试图将他治罪，但他逃走了。（尝试，试图，try）
其它用法：
（1）自然地移往（to move naturally towards）
Water seeks its own level.
水自然往下流。
The compass pointer always seeks the north.
罗盘的指针总是指向北方。
（2）not far to seek不难了解的；浅近的（easily seen /understood; at hand）
The reason for his failure was not far to seek, he was ill during the examination.
他不及格的原因不难理解，他在考试时病了。
8． observe vt.观察，看到，注意到（see and notice; watch carefully）
She has observed the stars all her life.
她一生观察星体。
They observed the thief stealing /steal the money.
他们看见这个小偷偷了钱。（observe sb do /doing sth.）
二、重难点句子
1． Scientists, on the other hand, Hawking writes, know that their job is never finished and that even the best theory can turn out to be wrong.
霍金写道，从另一个方面说，科学家知道他们的工作永远是无止境的，即使是最好的理论也可能被证明是错误的。
（1）on the other hand 与Hawking writes 均为本句的插语，原句应为：
Hawking writes scientists, on the other hand, know that…, scientists know that…是writes 的整个宾语主句，that their job… 则又是宾语从句中的谓语动词 knows 所引导的另一个宾语从句。
（2）…and that even the best theory can turn out to be wrong 是writes 引导的宾语从句中谓语动词know引导的第二个并列宾语从句。在英语中，宾语从句的引导词that可以被省略，但如果一个动词引导两个以上并列的宾语从句时，第二个及以后的宾语从句中的that不可省略。例如：
He said that he would come back soon and that he would continue to learn drawing.
他说他马上就会回来的，而且会继续学习绘画的。
（3）turn out“结果（是）；证明（是）；原来（是）”（to happen to be in the end）往往指结果与所预想的或表面上的不一致。例如：
His answer turned out to be wrong.
他的答案被证明是错误的。（turn out to be…）
The party turned out a success.
聚会很成功。（turn out sth）
He turned out to live in Hastings.
原来他住在黑斯廷斯。（turn out to do）
It's turned out nice and sunny again.
（天气）终于又是阳光普照了。
2． By asking why, how and what if, curious mind find new ideas and solutions.
通过不停地问自已为什么，如何运作和盘根究底的假设，这个求知的人终于找到新的主意及方法了。
what if倘使…将会怎样；即使…又有什么要紧。
例如：
What if we move the picture over here? Do you think it'll look better?
把画移到这儿会怎样？你看会不会好看一点？
What if you should fail?
假如你失败了，该怎么办呢？
What if he fails?
如果他失败又有什么关系？
篇4：unit13-16 重要词组(人教版高一英语下册教案教学设计)
建议某人做某事 suggest doing sth; advise sb to do sth, advise doing sth 努力做某事 take pains to do sth, take pains in/over doing sth
养成……的习惯 develop/form/get into/be in the habit of
革除……的习惯 get out of/get rid of the habit of
跟上,不落后 keep up with 对……作出选择 make a choice/choices about
从……中选择,挑选 choose from 选择做某事 choose to do sth
对……有益,有好处;适宜,有效 be good for 对……好 be good to
擅长做某事 be good at 适用于某人/物 go for sb/sth
减肥 lose weight; be/go on a diet 增肥 put on/gain weight
做……的方式 way to do sth, way of doing sth
准备做某事 be ready for/to do sth; be prepared for/to do sth; make preparations for sth
即使,尽管 jeven if/ though 不时地,偶尔 now and then
缺乏,短缺 be short of 是……的缩写 be short for
一点也不 not a bit 一点 a bit/little, alittle bit
很多,非常 not a little 在将来 in the future
使……强壮 make…strong 小心做某事 be careful to do sth
小心某事/物 be careful with sth 垃圾食品 junk food
……的原因 reasons for… 列单子,造单 make a list of
给某人一些建议 give some advice on sth 发烧 have a fever
感冒 have/catch a cold 一直 all the time
大量,许多 plenty of 抵抗疾病 fight disease
对……有害 be harmful to, do harm to 保持健康 keep fit
Unit 14. Festivals
以……而著名,闻名 be celebrated for 盛装打扮 dress up as/in
听说有关的人/事 hear about 听说过某人/物 hear of
了解有关……人/事的情况 know about 听说过,知道(有)…… know of
聚集,团聚 get together 在接下来的几天中 in the following days
有能力做某事 be able to do sth
允许某人做某事,允许做某事 allow sb to do sth, allow doing sth
与……相似之处 be similar to出于对某人的敬意,为了纪念…… in honour of
不仅…而且…;既…又… as well as 尽可能…… as… as one can
信赖,信仰;支持;主张 believe in 捉弄,戏弄某人 play tricks/ a trick on sb
欺骗,吸收,摄入,理解 take in 起飞,成名 take off
占据(时间/空间);开始从事 take up 呈现 take on
将A与B比较 compare A with B 将A比喻为B compare A to B
与……比较 compared with/to 要求某物 ask for sth
过去常常做某事 used to do sth 事实上 in fact
主题歌 theme song 问候某人 greet sb
与某人分享某物 share sth with sb 与……相似 be similar to
以……为根据,依据 base on; be based on 不得不 have (got) to
该轮到某人做某事 it is one’s turn to do sth
Unit 15. The necklace
认识/识别某人/物 recognise sb/sth (by sth) 毕竟;然而 after all
承认某人/物有效,认可recognise sb/sth (as sth)
因为,由于 because of 最重要的,首先 above all 与某人结婚 marry sb; get/be married to sb 编造 make up
A将B嫁给C A marry B to C 访问某人;号召,呼吁 call on sb
访问某地 call at sp 打电话 call up
回电 call back 要求;邀某人同往 call for
取消 call off 试穿/戴 try on
付款买 pay for 偿还 pay back
还清债务 pay off 记下,写下 write down
值得做某事 be worth doing sth; be worthy of being done; it is worthwhile doing sth/to do sth
提出,想出 come up with 将……扮演出来,将……付诸行动 act out 在某人去某地的路上 on one’s way to
扮演角色 play a role in 日日夜夜 day and night
被邀请去 be invited to 至多 at most
至少 at least 宁愿(不)做某事 would rather (not) do sth
继续做某事 continue to do sth 十年的辛苦工作 ten years of hard work
解开谜团 solve the mystery 在舞会上 at the ball
不幸运 without luck 为什么不做某事 why don’t you/why not do sth
选择A而不选择B prefer A to B
选择做某事而不选择做某事 prefer doing sth to doing sth; prefer to do sth rather than do sth
选择某人做某事 prefer sb to sth 拿回来,使恢复 bring back
Unit 16. Scientists at work
浪费某事 a waste of sth 浪费……做某事 waste sth on sth/in doing sth
在将来 in (the) future 利用，使用 make use of, take advantage of
做某事仔细，小心be careful doing/with/about sth 对某人有利to one’s advatage 免费地 free of charge 负责，掌管 in charge of
被/由……管理 in the charge of 结果证明是 prove to be/turn out
突然哭起来 burst into tears 含泪，流着眼泪 in tears
将某物撕成碎片 tear sth into pieces 扯下，拆毁 tear down
撕裂/毁 tear up 由……组成，构成 be made up of
由……制成（看不出）be made from （看出）be made of
把……制成…… be made into 在……生长，产 be made in
毫无疑问的 there is no doubt that; without/beyond/no doubt
怀疑地 in doubt 依某人看来 in one’s opinion/in the opinion of sb 将……和……联系在一起/将……和……绑/系在一起 tie…to…
将……和……绑/系在一起fasten…to… 保护……免受……protect…from…
为争取……而斗争 fight for 为反对……而斗争 fight against/with
和……并肩作战 fight with 在……（身上）做实验 test on
处理 do/deal with 挑选，辨别出 pick out 接收，捡起，中途搭载，无意中学会 pick up 接近，靠近get close to 制造噪音make noise
对……有益 be good for 对……有害be bad for/harmful to
因……而闻名be famous/known for 作为……而文明 be famous/known as
为……所熟知 be famous/known to sb 全世界 all over the world
在十八世纪 in the eighteenth century 做实验 do/conduct/carry out experiments; do/conduct/carry out an experiment
站立 stand up 将……加到……上 add…to… 加起来达到 add up to
在某人的控制之中 in the control of sb; under control失去控制 out of control 阻止做某事 prevent/stop/keep…from… 至少/多at least/most
例如such as 照顾 take care of 当心，小心 take care, look out, be careful
有/没有权利做某事 have right/no right to do sth
遵守/违背法律 obey/break the law
弄清楚 make clear 违背，反对 go against
大量，许多A number of, a great many, a great deal of, plenty of, lots of, a lot of
篇5：高二 Unit 19重点知识及讲解(人教版高二英语下册教案教学设计)
重点知识归纳及讲解
1．To be, or not to be -that is the question.
生还是死--这是个问题。
这句话是莎士比亚的戏剧《哈姆雷特》中的一个名句。意为“To live or not to live-that is the question.对于这种名句名言类的，在平时写作中可以采用仿似的修辞手法，给人印象深刻。根据家喻户晓的成语或谚语，临时更换其中的某个部分，造成新的成语或谚语；或者根据古今名言警句，在保持其原句不变的情况下，更换其中部分词语，这种修辞方式叫仿似。
eg. To lie or not to lie-the doctor’s dilemma.
撒谎还是不撒谎--医生的难题。
To do it or not to do it is not the only question.
做还是不做这事不是唯一的问题。
2．Uneasy lies the head that wears a crown.
戴王冠的头是不能安于他的枕席的。
①本句表语uneasy放到句首，引起完全倒装，这主要是因为主语过长，为了句子平衡，我们常常把形容词放于句首。
eg. Gone are the days when we used “foreign oil”.
我们用“洋油”的时代过去了。
Present at the meeting were the scientists, who came from different countries.
出席会议的是科学家，他们来自不同国家。
②（lie在此用作系动词，表示“处于某种状态”，它的过去式和过去分词分别为lay, lain.）
eg. The machine lay idle all week.这机器整整一周没有开动。
The dust has lain undisturbed for years. 尘土积在那儿很多年了。
③wear表示“穿着”指状态，可以用进行时；宾语除衣服鞋帽外，还可以是首饰，服饰，发型等。
eg. He’s wearing a new coat. 他穿着一件新大衣。
Does your brother wear glasses?你的弟弟戴眼镜吗？
He wears his hair very short.他留着短发。
She wears a string of pearls around her neck.
她的脖子上戴着一串珍珠项链。
wear还可作“（面容等）显露，呈现；磨损，磨破”讲
eg. She wore an angry expression.她面带笑容。
I have worn my socks into holes.我的袜子已磨出洞来了。
3. “Romeo, Romeo, why are you Romeo? Deny your father, and refuse your name”
罗密欧，罗密欧，为什么你叫罗密欧？与你的父亲断绝关系，不要你这个名字了吧
deny(denied, denied, denying)作为及物动词，表示“否认，不承认；不给，不准；（正式）抛弃，背弃”讲。它后面可接名词，动名词和宾语从句。
eg. Can you deny the truth of his statement?
你能否认他的声明的真实性吗？
He denied telling me/that he had told me.
他否认告诉过我。
I was denied the chance of going to college.
不给我上大学的机会。
He has denied his country and his principles!
他背弃了他的国家和他的原则！
4．What must Antonio give Shylock if he can’t pay back the debt?
如果安东尼奥不能偿还夏洛克的借款，他必须给夏洛克什么？
Pay back意为“还钱给某人”，主要句型有pay sb. back(sth) 和pay sth back.例如：
I’ll pay him back with all my heart. 我将用我的生命向他偿还。
Have you paid me back the money you owe me yet?
你向我借的钱还我了吗？
Pay back还表示“惩罚，报复”。例如：
I’ll pay him back for the trick he played on me.
他对我使坏，我得治治他。
与pay搭配的常见短语有：
pay for sth.为某事吃苦头或受惩罚
pay off带来好结果
pay sb off付清工资予以解雇；贿赂某人
pay sth. off全部偿还
pay sth. out（按时）为某事付巨款
pay up付清全部欠款
eg. The home team paid dearly for their defensive errors.
主队因防守错误而大吃苦头。
The gamble paid off.赌赢了。
pay off the crew of a ship 付清全部船员工资并予以解雇
pay off one’s debts, a loan, a mortgage还清债务、贷款、抵押款
I had to pay out ￡200 to get my car repaired!
我得花200英镑修理汽车！
We’re paying out ￡300 a month on our mortgage.
我们每月要付300英镑抵押贷款。
I’ll take you to court unless you pay up immediately.
除非马上还请欠款，否则我和你打官司。
5．What makes a play a masterpiece is that the ideas behind the play are about problems which are still important to people of different ages in modern times.
一部戏剧要成为不朽之作。剧中所反映的问题就应该对现代不同年龄层次的人仍然有重要的意义。
①句中what引导主语从句，that引导表语从句，which引导定语从句。
②people of different ages 表示所属关系“属于的”；
a girl of ten十岁的女孩儿
a child of strange appearance 外貌奇特的孩子
an item of value一件值钱的物品
③in modern times指“当代”。time 表示“时期，时代”常用复数。
in ancient times 在古代；in the time of Queen Victoria 在维多利亚女王时代
6．But when the roles are turned around, it is Shylock who must beg the Duke to save his life.
但是当角色被转变的时候，夏洛克一定请求公爵饶他一命。
①turn around在这里指“（方针、立场等）转变”。
②“it is shylock who”为强调句式，本句强调的是主语部分。注意强调句的特点是去掉It is/was和that，剩余部分经过整理后整个句子仍然成立。
③beg sb. to do sth.意为“恳求或祈求某人做某事物”。例如：
I beg you not to take any risks.我恳求你不要冒险。
7．What would you do if you had your worst enemy in your power?
①如果你最坏的敌人处于你的掌握之中，你将会怎么做？
②in one’s power意为“在某人的掌握之中，任由某人摆布”
The enemy is in our power.
敌人在我们的控制之中。
8.We can find several such ideas in Shakespeare’s play.
我们可以在莎士比亚的戏剧中找到一些这种观点。
在ideas这个中心名词前有两个限定词修饰。限定词是在名词词组中对名词中心词起特指、泛指、类指以及表示确定数量和非确定数量等限定作用的词类。限定词包括：①冠词 ②形容词性物主代词 ③名词所有格 ④形容词性指示代词 ⑤所有格关系代词 ⑥所有格疑问代词 ⑦形容词性不定代词 ⑧基数词和序数词 ⑨倍数词和分数词 ⑩量词。限定词可分为：①前位限定词②中位限定词 ③后位限定词。个别限定词有跨类现象，如本句such既属予前位限定词，又可归入后位限定词。当与冠词a, an连用时属于前位限定词，例如：such a suit; 当与some, any, all, few, another, other, many, several, one, two等词搭配时属于后位限定词，即such要放在这些词之后，例如：many such books, no such car。
9．Have mercy on Antonio, Shylock.
夏洛克，对安东尼奥会仁慈一点吧。
句中mercy为不可数名词，意为“仁慈，宽恕”。常见的短语有：
①have mercy on/upon sb./sth.=show mercy to sb/sth表示“对表示同情；对有怜悯之心”
②at the mercy of sb./sth任由某人或某事摆布
③throw oneself on sb’s mercy恳求某人宽恕/善待
eg. She has mercy on little animals. 她怜悯小动物。
They showed little mercy to their enemies.他们对敌人毫不仁慈。
His life shall be at the mercy of the Duke.
他的生命将由公爵处置。
The ship was at the mercy of the storm.
那只船在暴风雨中失去控制。
He threw himself on my mercy.他求我宽恕他。
10．I’ve promised to take my pound of flesh.
我已经许诺割下我的一磅肉。
①promise作为及物动词，常接的结构有promise to do sth; promise sb. to do sth; promise后接双宾语和promise接从句。
eg. I never promised to obey her commands.
我从未答应过要服从她的命令。
His pareats promised him to buy a new bike.
他父母答应给他买辆新车。
She promised me a gift for my birthday.
她答应送我一件生日礼物。
He promised that he would come.
他答应来。
②flesh与meat的辨析
flesh通常指人或动物身上的肉，也可指供食用的兽类的肉（区别于鱼或禽的肉）。meat 指供食用的肉类的总称，通常不包括鱼和家禽的肉。
eg. You’re losing flesh.你瘦了。
Lions are flesh-eating animals. 狮子是肉食动物。
I like meat while my sister likes fish.
我喜欢吃肉而我妹妹喜欢吃鱼。
注意：meat 是供食用的肉类的总称，猪肉、牛肉、羊肉等各有其专门名称，即pork, beef, mutton
11. It’s useless trying to argue with Shylock.
尽力与夏洛克争论是没有用的。
It’s useless doing= It’s no use doing表示“做没有用处”
由it作形式主语，真正的主语是后面的动名词。例如：
It is no use learning without thinking.学而不思则罔。
It’s no good crying over spilt mick.覆水难收。
12．You might as well go stand upon the beach and argue with the sea.
你还不如站在海滩上跟大海讲理去。
①might as well表示给人提出建议时的常见的短语，意为“不妨好，还是好。”
I might as well tell you the truth.
我还是告诉你事实真相的好。
②go stand upon sth.表示“去站在上面”。例如：
Would you please go stand upon that board?
你愿意去站在那块板上吗？
He dare not go stand upon that high tower.
他不敢去站在那座高塔上。
13. Pass judgement on me and give Shylock what he wants.
对我宣判吧，把夏洛克想要得到的东西给他吧。
pass judgment on sb.表示“对某人宣判”。
eg. When will the judge pass judgement on that woman?
法官什么时候对那个女子审判？
The court will not pass judgement on him until next Sunday.
直到下周日法庭才会对他宣判。
14. If you offered me six times what you have just offered, I would still take my pound of flesh.
即使你愿意给我六倍个刚才你提出的那个钱数，我还是要拿回我应得的那一磅肉。
①本句为虚拟语气，表示与现在事实相反。
②offer即可作动词又可以作名词，表示主动提出，提供（一种东西或一项建议）；还表示出价，与介词for连用
eg. The young man offered the old man his own seat.(offer sb. sth.)
那位年轻人主动将自己的座位让给了老大爷。
I offered him fifty thousand dollars for the house.(offer sb. money for sth.)
我向他出价5万美金买这栋房子。
He offered to lend me some books.(offer to do)
他主动提出借一些书给我。
③times(n.)在此处用来表示倍数。用times表示“甲是乙的几倍大（高、长、宽等）”。
（1）“甲比乙大（高、长、宽等）几倍”，可以用下列句型：
A is three times the size(height, length, width, etc) of the old one.
The new building is four times the size(the height) of the old one.
这座新楼是那座旧楼的四倍大（四位高）。（这座新楼比那座旧楼大三倍[高三倍]了）
This street is four times the length(the width) of that one.
这条街是那条街的四倍长（四倍宽）。
The size(The height) of the new building is four times that of the old one.
这座新楼的大小（高度）是那座旧楼的四倍。（由于句首已用了the size, the height, 所以在four times后面用代词that来代替，以避免重复。）
（2）A is three times as big(high, long, wide, etc) as B
Asia is four times as large as Europe.
亚洲是欧洲的四倍大。（亚洲比欧洲大三倍。）
This box is three times as heavy as that one.
这个箱子是那个箱子的三倍重。
（3）A is three times bigger (higher, longer, wider)than B
The meeting-room is three times bigger than our office.
会议室比我们的办公室大三倍。
注意：用times表示倍数，一般只限于表示包括基数在内三倍或三倍以上的数。表示两倍可以用twice(adv.)或double(adj.)。例如：
The room is twice the size of that one.= This room is twice as big as that one.
这个房间是那个房间的两倍大。
Our total income of was double of .
我们的总收是的两倍。
15．How can you hope for mercy yourself when you show none?
如果你一点儿都不对别人表现仁慈，又怎么能希望自己得到仁慈？
①when 在此处引导一个条件状语从句
②hope不能直接跟宾语，它需要一个介词for。
eg. Hope for the best, prepare for the worst.
抱最好的希望，作最坏的准备。
We are hoping for better weather soon.
我们期待天气会很快好转。
16．I desire my pound of flesh.
desire 是及物动词，意为“渴望，要求，期望”。后面可接名词（代词）、动词不定式及从句作宾语。
eg. All of us desire better life and more education.
我们所有人都渴望更好的生活和更多的教育。
We always desire to live in peace with our neighbour.
我们总是渴望与邻国和平相处。
Mr Wang desires that you should go to the teacher’s office at once.
王老师希望你立刻到教师办公室去。
desire还可作名词，意为“渴望，要求”
eg. At the desire of the teacher, we should finish our homework on time.按照老师的要求，我们应该准时完成作业。
17. I do not envy you your job. This is a most troublesome case.
我不羡慕你的工作，这是一件是棘手的案件。
①envy sb. sth表示“羡慕某人，嫉妒某人”。
I envy you very much.我真羡慕你。
She envies me my good health.她羡慕我身体好。
②a most+adj.= a very + adj.表示“一个很的”。
the most+形容词最高级表示“最之意”，这时句末一定要有表达范围的介词of或in.
eg. Dalian is a most beautiful coastal city.
大连是一座很美的海滨城市。
This is a most enjoyable party.这是一次令人极为愉快的晚会。
She worked out the most difficult problem of the three.
她解出了这三道题中最难的一道。
Mary is the most beautiful girl in our class.
玛丽是我们班里最美的女孩。
18．What are you accused of ?你因什么而受到起诉？
accuse sb. of sth. 意为“因控告人，告发，指责人”
eg. The police accused him of theft.警方控告他偷窃。
He was accused of murder. 他被控谋杀。
She accused him of being late.她指责他迟到。
19．Let me tear up this paper.让我们这张借条撕了吧。
句中的tear up的意思是“撕毁”
eg. She tore up all the letters he had seut her.
她把他写来的信都撕了。
tear up可以引申为“不履行”。
eg. He accused his secretary of tearing up the agreement.
他控告他的助理不履行协议。
tear down意为“弄倒，拆除”。
eg. They are tearing down those old house to build a new office block.
他们拆除那些旧房子以便盖一座新办公楼。
20．Antonio, get ready and offer up your breast.
安东尼奥，准备好露出你的胸膛。
offer up 在本句中意为“奉献”，主要用于表示向上帝或神祭献某人或某物。例如：
She offered up a prayer to God for her husband’s safe return.
她向上帝祈讨保佑她丈夫平安回来。
21．I declare the court allows it and the law gives it to you.
我宣布法庭允许你，法律判给你这一磅肉。
declare表示“正式宣布（某事）；表明，郑重地说（某事）”。
eg. America declared war on Iraq last year.
去年美国向伊拉克宣战。
They declared him(to be) the winner.
他们宣布他为得胜者。
He declared that he had nothing to do with the matter.
他宣称自己与此事无关。
She was declared(to be) guilty. 已宣判她有罪。
22．He agreed to lend Antonio the money on one condition.
他同意借钱给安东尼奥，但有个条件。
condition在此处意为“条件”，需要识记的短语为：
on this/that condition在这种或那种情况下
on what condition 在什么情况下
on no condition无论什么情况都不
in condition健康良好
out of condition身体不佳
on condition that是从属连词，引导条件状语从句，意为“只有在条件下”（=only if），“条件是”。
eg. You may borrow this book on condition that you do not lend it to anyone else.你可以借这本书，条件是不能再借给别人。
Ability and effort are conditions of success.
才能和努力是成功的条件。
On this condition you may go home earlier.
在这种情况下，你可以早一点回家。
On what condition will you agree with me?
什么条件下，你才能同意我？
He can’t climb the mountain because he is out of condition.
他不能爬山，因为他身体欠佳。
23．He is young, but I never knew so young a body with so wise a head.他很年轻，但是我过
去从来不知道有这么年轻又如此聪明的人。
在一个名词词组中，不定冠词a/an通常用在形容词的前面。如a serious mistake。但是，如果形容词前面有so, too, how时，a/an 就该放在形容词后面，其结构是“so/too/how+adj+a/an+n.”。能够构成这种结构的名词必须是单数可数名词。
eg. Did you notice that you have made so serious a mistake?
你是否注意到你出了一个很严重的错？
It’s too difficult a book for beginners.
这本书对初学者是太难了。
How wonder ful a plan it would be! 那该是一个多么好的计划啊。
试比较：He is so good a teacher that we all like him.= He is such a good student that we all like him.
练一练：用so, such填空
1.__________ big a city 2._____________ a pretty girl
3.__________ good students 4._____________fine weather
5.__________many books 6._____________much water
7.__________ little food 8._____________ few oranges
答案：
1. so 2. such 3. such 4. such 5. so 6. so 7.so 8. so
24.You want justice, so you get justice, more than you wanted.
他要求公正，那么就让你得到公证，比你要求的还要多。
shall 在此处用于第二人称，表示说话人的允诺，意思是“可以”。
在本剧的最后还有：everything that he owns shall be taken away from him. One half of his money and his goods shall be givenand the other half shall be given两句中的shall用于第三人称，表示法令、规章等中的规定，意思是“必须”。shall 用于第二、三人称，还表示决心、命令、警告、要求、义务等。
eg. He shall answer for his misdeeds.他应当为他的错误行为负责。
You shall have a nice present for your birthday.
你过生日时将会得到一份精美的礼物。
Nothing shall stop us from carrying out this plan.
什么也不能阻止我们实现这项计划。
shall用于第一、三人称的疑问句，表示说话人征求对方意见。
eg. Shall we go now?我们现在走可以吗？
She he come in?可以让他进来吗？
25．Therefore, go down on your knees and beg the Duke for mercy.
因此，跪下来请求公爵的宽恕吧。
①go down on one’s knees 的意思是“跪下”、“屈膝”。
They will never go down on their knees before the oppressors.
他们绝不向压迫者屈膝。
②beg for意为“乞求，请求”
He went down on his knees and begged for forgiveness.
他跪下来请求饶恕。
26．My money and goods are as dear to me as life itself.
我的钱和财产对我就像生命一样宝贵。
dear 在此处的意思是“珍贵的”
He lost everything that was dear to him.
他表达了他所珍贵的一切。
goods在此处的意思的“动产”。
27．Shylock must promise to leave the money upon his death to his daughter and her husband.
夏洛克必须答应在他死后把这笔钱给他的女儿和女婿。
①句中的upon 等于on,表示“就在某时或某场合之后。”例如：
Upon my arrival home I found there was something strange.
我一到家就发现不对劲。
On asking for information I was told I must wait.
我一打听，说我得等着。
②leave sth. to sb.表示“将某事物遗赠给某人；死后留下某物给某人”
leave all one’s money to charity把所有的钱遗赠给慈善事业。
篇6：Unit 10重难点解析 (人教版高一英语下册教学论文)
Unit 10重难点解析
1. Use the questions below to get started and try to think of more questions.(Speaking)
get started意为 “开始活动、工作等”。类似的还有：get washed洗脸；get dressed穿衣；get lost迷路。如：
Sarah, hurry up. I’m afraid you wouldn’t have time to _____ before the party. (NMET 2004 I)
A. get changed B. get change
C. get changing D. get to change
此题选A。句意为 “你恐怕在晚会开始之前没有时间换衣服了”。
2. We often talk about how important it is to take good care of ourselves and our planet... (Reading)
这里宾语从句是一个感叹句结构，how是感叹副词。如：
You can’t imagine how proud Du Li was when she won the first gold medal in the 2004 Athens Olympic Games.
你难以想象当杜丽赢得20雅典奥运会首枚金牌时是多么自豪。
Parents are taught to understand ______ important education is to their children’s future. (广东2004)
A. that B. how C. such D. so
此题选B。宾语从句是一个感叹句结构，原句缺少感叹副词how。
3. When the habitat of a species is changed or destroyed, the animal or plant has to either adapt to the change or find a new home. (Reading)
1）species意为“（动植物）物种；种类”，单复数同形。如：
A species can become endangered for different reasons.
一个物种濒危可能是各种原因引起的。
The Origin of Species was written by Charles Darwin.
《物种起源》是查理达尔文写的。
2）either...or...是并列连词，连接两个并列成分，意为“或者……或者……”。连接并列主语时，谓语要与邻近的主语保持人称和数的一致。如：
Either my father or my brothers are coming. 不是我父亲就是我兄弟要来。
Either say you’re sorry or else get out! 你要么道歉,要么滚开!
3）adapt意为“使适应(to)；使适合(to)；改编(for; from)”。如：
You should adapt yourself to the new environment. 你应该适应新环境。
The movie was adapted from a novel.
这部电影是由小说改编的。
4. Even small things can make a big difference. (Post-reading)
1）even用作副词，意为“甚至；更”，起加强语气的作用。如：
Everyone was on time for the meeting -_____ Chris, who’s usually ten minutes late for everything. (湖南2004)
A. but B. only C. even D. yet
此题选C。这里even表示强调，意为“即使；连……都”。
2）make a/no/much difference意为“有影响/无关紧要/很重要”。如：
Exercise can make a big difference to your state of health.
锻炼对你的身体状况影响很大。
5. Professor Stevenson, who has devoted himself to protecting the milu deer, gave a talk to Chinese college students in Beijing. (Grammar)
devote oneself/one’s life/one’s time to表示“把自己/某人一生/某人的时间投身于”，to 是介词，后接名词、代词或动词-ing形式。devoted to表示“专心致志于, 献身于；热爱，很喜欢”。如：
Although the working mother is very busy, she still ______ a lot of time to her children. (上海2000)
A. devotes B. spends C. offers D. provides
Reed made up his mind to devote all he had to _____ some schools for poor children. (上海春)
A. set up B. setting up C. have set up D. having set up
Her son, to whom she was so _______, went abroad ten years ago. (上海2001)
A. loved B. cared C. devoted D. affected
这三个题的最佳选项分别为A、B、C。例1和例3侧重于动词词义辨析和该短语的识别；例2侧重于该结构中介词to的判断与运用。he had是定语从句，修饰先行词all, 此处省略了关系代词that。
6. Reduce the amount of rubbish. [Integrating Skills]
reduce常用作及物动词，意为“减少，缩小（尺寸、数量等），降低（价格、程度等）”。如：
-The cars give off a great deal of waste gas in the streets.
-Yes. But I’m sure something will be done to _____ air pollution. （上海）
A. reduce B. remove C. collect D. warn
此题选A。从上句“汽车排出大量的废气”可知，应用reduce表示“采取措施的目的”是“降低空气污染的程度”。
责任编辑：李芳芳
篇7：Unit 9 重难点解析 (人教版高一英语下册教学论文)
Unit 9 重难点解析
1. Modern cellphones are more than just phones - they are being used as cameras and radios, and to send e-mail or surf the Internet.(Reading)
more than本意为“多于,超过”,可引申为“不仅仅;远不止;极其”。如:
They were more than willing to help.
他们非常愿意帮忙。
She was more than frightened at the sight.
看到这情景,她简直吓坏了。
动词不定式短语to send e-mail...是跟在they are being used后面的。也就是说,这个句子应该是:They are being used to send e-mail or surf the Internet.
2. The latest cellphones have features such as games, music and an electronic calendar that will remind you about appointments and important dates.(Reading)
remind 作 “使……想起”解时,后可接of引起的短语或从句。如:
The story you have just told reminds me of an experience I once had.
你刚才讲的那个故事使我想起了我的一次经历。
That reminds me that I must write to him.
那使我想起来我该给他写信了。
remind 作 “提醒”解时, 后可接带不定式的复合结构, 也可接of或about引起的短语, 还可接从句。如:
Remind him to close the windows when he leaves.
提醒他在离开时把窗子一一关上。
She asked me over the telephone to remind you about the party.
她打电话来要我提醒你不要忘了赴宴。
3. They are being used everywhere - sometimes where they shouldn’t.
(Reading)
句中are being used为现在进行时的被动语态;where引导的是一个地点状语从句,表示“在……的地方”;shouldn’t 的后面省略了be used, 以避免重复。如:
Put things where you can easily find them.
把东西放在你容易找到的地方。
These words were said where they shouldn’t.
这些话说在了不该说的地方。
责任编辑：李芳芳
篇8：高一英语unit13教案(人教版高一英语下册教案教学设计)
Ⅰ. Teaching Goals:
1. Talk about eating habits and health. Talk about seeing the doctor. Practise giving advice and making suggestions.
2. Use the modal verbs: had better, should and ought to.
3. Learn some useful cooking terms. Read and write recipes.
Ⅱ. Teaching Times: 5 periods
The First Period
§ Teaching Aims:
1. Learn and master the following words and phrases: sweet, mushroom, fried, junk food, fat, snack, stomach, fever, salad, peach, ripe, ought, examine, plenty, all the time, have a fever, be careful with, plenty of.
2. Sentence Patterns: (1) advise sb. (not) to do sth.
(2) There’s sth. wrong with…
3. Train the Ss’ listening ability.
4. Develop the Ss’ speaking ability by describing, talking and discussion.
§ Important Points & Difficult Points:
1. Trains the Ss’ listening ability.
2. Master the new phrases, sentence patterns and everyday English and make the Ss be free to talk about their favourite food and give reasons for their decisions.
3. How to finish the task of speaking.
§ Teaching Methods:
1. Listening-and-answering activity to help Ss go through with the listening material.
2. Individual, pair or group work to make every student work in class.
§ Teaching Aids:
1. a tape recorder
2. the blackboard
§ Teaching Procedures:
Step 1. Warming-up: Brainstorm (words about food)
* List the food we eat in the Spring Festival:
rice, porridge, noodle, dumpling, corn, big flatbread, steamed bun, fried twisted dough sticks, walnut, peanut, chestnut, bean cake, mushroom, fried chips, hamburger, ice cream, chocolate, apple, pear, banana, orange, grape, chicken, beef, fish, pork, cucumber, carrot, tomato, potato, cabbage.
* Fill in the table
Name Food Junk food / Healthy food
Breakfast
Lunch
Snack
Supper
* Talk: Are these food good for our health, or be harm to our health?
Model:
A: Do you like eating fried chips? B: Yes, I like it very much.
A: But I think it is junk food, because it has a lot of fat and sugar.
B: Really? So I’d better not eat too much.
Step 2. Speaking
T: There are so many food for us to eat, right? They are very delicious, but if you eat too much in a meal, or eat some raw food, you will be ill as Sharon. Turn to Page 3, read the dialogue and pay attention to the useful expressions.
* Useful Expression
I’ve got a pain here. This place hurts. I don’t feel well.
There’s sth. wrong with my back / my knee / my arm.
Lie down and let me examine you. Let me have a look.
* Make a short dialogue
Step 3. Listening
* First time, listen carefully and try to understand what does it talk about?
* Second time, answer the following questions
1. What’s wrong with Mike?
2. What did Mike have for breakfast?
3. Can you give Mike some advice? What should he eat less of?
* Third time, answer the next three questions
1. Which side of Mike’s stomach hurts?
2. Does Mike have a fever?
3. What does the doctor tell Mike to do?
Step 4. Homework
1. One reading exercise everyday
2. Ex1 & 2 on Page 72
3. Preview the reading part
§ The Design of the Writing on the Bb
Unit 13 Healthy eating (first period)
Brainstorm: Words & Phrases:
dumpling, all the time
corn, have a fever
noodle… be careful with…
The Second Period
§ Teaching Aims:
1. Learn and master the following words and phrases: soft, bar, fuel, diet, calory, pace, bean, fibre, mineral, disease, environmental, chemical, probably, balance, keep up with, too much, make choices, be harmful to, lose weight, be prepared for, go for
2. Improve the Ss’ reading ability.
3. Enable the Ss to understand the best way to make sure that we will feel and look fine is to develop healthy eating habits by learning the reading text
§ Important Points & Difficult Points:
1. Improve the Ss’ reading ability.
2. Master the following phrases: keep up with, too much, make choice, be harmful to, lose weight, be prepared for.
3. How to make the Ss understand the reading material better and answer the questions on the passage.
§ Teaching Method:
1. Discussion before reading to make Ss interested in what they will learn
2. Discussion after reading to make Ss understand what they’ve learned better
3. Fast reading to get a general idea of each paragraph
4. Careful reading to get the detailed information in the text
§ Teaching Aids:
1. a tape recorder
2. the blackboard
§ Teaching Procedures:
Step 1. Review the words and phrases learnt last period
Step 2. Pre-reading
Q1. Which of the following gives you the most energy: a banana, a soft drink, a bar of chocolate? (a bar of chocolate)
Q2. How many meals do you eat every day? Which meal do you think is the most important? Why? (3, breakfast)
Q3. How much water do you drink every day?
Step 3. Reading
* Fast reading, what does the text mainly talk about?
* Details
Q1. What does the word “green” mean in the text above? What about the word “fuel”? Can you find any other words used in the same way?
A: unpolluted, unharmful and good for people’s health; other words used in the same way; fuel means all the things we eat for our bodies, it can help keep our body functioning and fighting disease.
Q2. The text gives examples of how people make choices about what they eat. List the examples and the reasons why people eat or don’t eat certain kinds of food.
A: Many people today make choices about their eating habits based on what they believe. Some people are vegetarians, because they believe it is healthier not to eat meat or because they do not think we should kill animals for food.
Q3. How have our eating habits changed? Why? Try to think of as many examples and reasons as possible.
A: People have experienced the processes from having no enough food to having enough food, and later from having enough food to having better food. Now people buy and eat sth. , we not only think about if the will give us the nutrients we need, but also if the food belongs to eco-foods.
Q4. Why do people go to fast food restaurants?
A: it is very convenient, and it can save time.
Q5. Why is it not good for you to eat too much sugar or fat?
A: If people eat too much sugar and fat, they put on weight very easily and some of them may have bad teeth.
Q6. Why are crash diets and supplements so popular?
A: Because people want to be smarter, healthier, in particular, young people want to be more beautiful. It goes with the need of the times.
Q7. What can we do to keep a balanced diet?
A: Buy and eat good, nutrient foods from all the food in the right amounts, and eat less sugar and take more exercise.
* More exercises: translate the sentences underlined on Page4 into Chinese
Step 4. Homework
1. Finish word study on Page5
2. Preview the integrating skill reading on Page74
3. One reading exercise every day
The Third Period
§ Teaching Aims:
1. Learn and master the following words and phrases: soft, bar, fuel, diet, calory, pace, bean, fibre, mineral, disease, environmental, chemical, probably, balance, keep up with, too much, make choices, be harmful to, lose weight, be prepared for, go for
2. Improve the Ss’ reading ability.
3. Enable the Ss to understand the best way to make sure that we will feel and look fine is to develop healthy eating habits by learning the reading text
§ Important Points & Difficult Points:
1. Improve the Ss’ reading ability.
2. Master the following phrases: keep up with, too much, make choice, be harmful to, lose weight, be prepared for.
3. How to make the Ss understand the reading material better and answer the questions on the passage.
§ Teaching Method:
1. Discussion before reading to make Ss interested in what they will learn
2. Discussion after reading to make Ss understand what they’ve learned better
3. Fast reading to get a general idea of each paragraph
4. Careful reading to get the detailed information in the text
§ Teaching Aids:
1. a tape recorder
2. the blackboard
§ Teaching Procedures:
Step 1. Revision: What does the text mainly talk about?
Ask some Ss to try to say sth. about the text.
Step 2. Integrating Skills--Don’t be a Mouse Potato (on Page74)
* Fast Reading
Read the quickly in 5 minutes, and then answer the following questions.
Q1. What is a couch potato?
A: couch potatoes means people who spend too much time in front of the TV and eat too much junk food.
Q2. What is junk food according to this text?
A: It is food that has a lot of calories but few nutrients, vitamins and minerals.
Q3. Why are people becoming potatoes and what can people do to avoid it?
A: One reason is our modern way of life; we must make sure that our diet is varied and balanced.
* More reading exercises on extra materials from English Weekly.
Step 3. Important Points and Difficult Points
1. prepare (sth.) to do / for… 2. in the form of… 以…形式
prepare oneself for… 3. be short of 短缺…
be / get prepared for / to do… 4. go for 也如此，对…也适用，向…攻击
5. be based on / upon 以…为依据
6. exercise不可数，意为“运动” exercises可数，意为“练习，体操，演习”
7. not a bit一点儿也不 not a little非常
* Exercises
1. Bob is a diligent student and is ___ his coming examinations while his mother is ___ supper.
A. preparing for; preparing for B. preparing; preparing for
C. preparing for; preparing D. preparing; preparing
2. We should do more exercises, both __ for our health and __ for our knowledge.
A.exercise;exercise B. exercises;exercisesC.exercise;exercises D.exercises; exercise
3. ___ do you base your calculation?
A. On which B. On what C. About what D. For what
4. some stones weigh ___ fifteen tons.
A. as more as B. so more as C. as much as D. as many as
5. ---Are all the telephone numbers ___ in the directory? ---Yes, all __ Jane’s.
A. listed; included B. listing; includes C. listed; including D. being listed; includes
6. Before the election, the candidates(候选人) ___ each other in the newspaper.
A. went with B. went for C. went over D. went forth
7. The boy __ on the ground __ that he had seen a cock __ an egg.
A. laying; lay; lay B. lying; lie; lie C. lying; lied; lay D. lay; lying; lay
8. Jenny ___ have kept his word. I wonder why she changed her mind.
A. must B. should C. need D. would
9. We ___ last night, but we went to the concert instead.
A. must have studied B. might study C. should have studied D. would study
Answers: 1. C 2. C 3. B 4. C 5. C 6. B 7. C 8. B 9. C
Step 4. Homework
1. One reading exercise every day
2. Prepare a healthy diet and explain why it is healthy
3. Remember the first 15 words and prepare for the dictation.
The Forth Period
§ Teaching Aims:
1. Review the words learned in the last three periods.
2. Learn and master modal verbs: had better, should, ought to
§ Important Points & Difficult Points:
1. How to guess the missing word according to the given sentence.
2. Let the Ss learn how to give advice or opinion about sth. , especially master hoe to use “should, ought to, had better and their negative forms” to give advice.
§ Teaching Aids:
1. a tape recorder
2. the blackboard
§ Teaching Procedures:
Step 1. Revision---dictation about the first 15 words in this Unit
1. junk food 2. fat 3. stomach 4. salad 5. ought to 6. energy 7. peach 8. plenty of 9. examine 10. ripe 11. soft 12. fever 13. fuel 14. diet 15. keep up with
Step 2. Word Study
Give Ss 5 minutes to do the exercises on Page5, then ask some Ss to say the Chinese meaning of the sentences, and check the answers.
1. nutrient 2. diet 3. vitamin 4. mineral 5. fat 6. sugar 7. protein 8. calory
Step 3. Grammar
* Translate the following sentences into English
1. 外面很冷，你最好穿上你大衣。
It is cold outside, you’d better put on your coat.
2. 你最好别脱下你的衣服。
You had better not take off your clothes.
3. 我们应该尊敬老师和父母。
We should / ought to respect our teachers and parents.
4. 你不应该这么粗心。
You shouldn’t / ought not to be so careless.
* More exercises on Page5 and Page74
Step 4. Homework
1. One reading exercise every day
2. Remember the second 15 words
篇9：新课标高一英语下unit22全单元(新课标版高一英语下册教案教学设计)
Period 1 Warming-up & Listening
Goals:
1. Talk about amusement parks and our experiences.
2. Learn to express likes and dislikes about the amusing activities.
3. Be able to listen for information and understanding.
Teaching Procedures:
Step 1 Warming-up
Task 1 Talk about the topic and the word FUN
Students talk about fun things use Adjs to describe fun things
Question 1. What is fun? (snowing, sailing, hiking, rafting---)
2.What do fun things have in common?
Cooking is fun because it is challenging ( interesting, relaxing---).
3. Where can we have fun? ( cinemas, amusement parks, theme parks---
Fun is everywhere if we can enjoy it.)
Task 2 Talk about our own experiences
Questions: 1. Have you ever been to an amusement park? What did you see?
2. Have you ever tried sitting in a roller coaster?
3. How did you feel?
4. Do you like it? Why?
Task 3 Watch pictures and talk about likes and dislikes
1. Look at the pictures and name the activites
Question: Do you like these activities? Why / Why not?
2. Do an interview to find others’ ideas (make up a dialogue).
The dialogue can be like this:
Student A: Hello, .... Have you ever been to an amusement park?
Student B: Oh, yes. I have tried…
Student A: Do you like it?
Student B: Sure. I like it because it’s really exciting and …
Step2 Listening
Pre-listening Talk about the theme of the theme parks
A theme park must have a special theme.
Questions: If you are to build a theme park, what theme will you have? Why?
While-listening: Listen and finish the exercises 1 and 2
Post-listening: 1. Fill in the following form.
Which of the parks do you think is better?
Name Theme Your reason and ideas
2. Act out and make decisions
Situation: Two presidents of different colleges in England come to China to try to persuade Chinese students to study in his college in England. Have two students prepare in advance and make a report in class.Other students listen to the report and make their own decisions.
Students can also think up their own situations
Homework
a. Recall all the new words and expressions that occur in this period.
b. Finish the exercise Talk on the workbook.
c. Preview Reading
Period 2 Reading
Goals:
1. Learn some expressions about theme parks.
3. Read through the material and have a good understanding of theme parks.
Step 1 Pre-reading
Task 1. Watch some pictures of some parks and have fun
2. Lead-in questions:
a. What do you think you can see in a theme park?
b. Do you like scary rides? Why?
c. What do you think of adventure sports?
Step 2 Reading
Task1 Students read the text and find necessary information.
Q: What is a theme park?
A: As we all know, a theme park is a wonderful park. It has its own theme. It has a collection of rides, exhibitions and other attractions.
T: What are the activities based on?
Ss: The activities are based on a common theme.
Task 2 Skimming
Question 1. How many theme parks does the writer tell us?
What are they ? Where are they?
Task 3 Scanning
Question: What are the themes about?
What attract people in these theme parks?
Read through the passage, then fill in the form below.
Par Parks Themes Attractions
1
2
3
4
Notes: Pay attention to the new phrases and sentences
Entering one of the attractions at Universal Studios is like steeping into the world of your favorite film.
It seemed like people just cannot get enough of scary rides and exciting adventures.
The parks are becoming more advanced and new technology allow us to experience almost anything without actually being in danger or risking injury.
Ask certain questions to check students’ understanding to these sentences.
Task 4 Discussing
1. Which of the theme parks mentioned in the text will you visit? Why?
2. Why are theme parks so popular throughout the world ?
这是一个大话题，可集思广益。
Step 3 Designing
Task 1.Design a theme park and exchange ideas in class by interviewing.
2. Draw a map for your park
Activity: Students think up ideas about building a certain theme park, write and report the design, the place, the building time, the reason, hope...(refer to P70)
Name location theme Attractions activities
(work in groups of 4)
Homework
1. Read some articles(teacher provided) to facilitate the designing of students’ theme parks.
2. Design a theme park and draw a map.
Period 3 Speaking
Goals:
1. Practise giving directions.
2. Enlarge expressions of asking the way and answering.
Step 1 Check the homework
Have students talk about their theme parks
Step 2 Listening
Task Listen and answer
Listen to 2 dialogues and answer the following:
Question: What does the conversation mean?
Where is she going?
How to get there?
Step 3 Speaking
Task Watch the map and find the way
Pre-speaking
T: Suppose we are at the main entrance of this theme park and we want to go to some places: the Ocean world, the History Land, the Bungee Jumping…
Please write about how we can get there, according to page 65.
While-speaking
Make up dialogues of asking for and giving directions.
Post-speaking
Give directions
Situation: Suppose you are at the main entrance of your theme park and you are introducing some attractions and the way to them to a group of tourists. Use the map you have drawn and show the way around.
Step 4 Useful Expressions
Work in groups and conclude some useful expressions of asking the way and giving directions.
Homework
1. Finish the Workbook Talking
2. Look for necessary information and write several sentences about theme parks
Period 4 Integrating Skills
Goals:
1. Read through the texts in the Intergrating Part of the text.
2. Learn to write a description.
Step1 Warming up
Task 1 Report on the writing of theme parks.
Students share their writings in class using the Project and teacher makes necessary comments.
Task 2 1. Read more about theme parks
Have students read Reading in Intergrating Skills in the Workbook.
Have students finish the following table.
Parks theme attractions
1
2
3
4
5
Step2 Reading
Have students read the passage on P69 .
Task 1 Skimming
Question:
What attraction can be found important in theme parks?
→ Rides, the “thrill ride” …
Task 2 Scanning
Questions:
1. How do people ride roller coasters nowadays?
2. What is a thrill ride like?
Task 3 Discussing
Question : What else can we do in a thrill ride?
S1: We can dash through the snow during the ride.
S2: We will ride together with some animals.
S3: The car rides in a desert.
… …
Summary:
We can imagine so many ways, but it’s still not enough.
The only limit to the fun is the imagination of the designers of the thrill rides. It seems to be endless.
Quote:
The great progress in science roots in completely new and brave imaginations of the human beings.
----- Dewey
“科学的伟大进步源自于崭新与大胆的想象力。”
----- 杜 威
Step 3 Designing
Activity: 1.Design the scariest and most exciting ride in the world.
2. Describe your ride.
Tips: What should your ride look like?
How large is it?
What is the length?
What color is it?
How many people can it take?
How does it work?
How fast should it be?
What does it sound like?
What does it feel like?
How would you design the loops, corkscrews and other features?
How much should it cost?
What about the ticket for each? …
Homework: 1. Finish the design and description of the ride
2. Preview Language Study.
Period 5 Language Study
Goals:
1. Revise the words.
2. Learn to use the –ing form: used as an adverbial.
Step 1 check the homework
1. Exhibit the design of students.
2. Project some descriptions and make comments.
Step 2 Word Study
Activity 1.Write the following words on the blackboard :
statue entertainment minority collection attraction
advanced rocket amusement ancient explore
Ask the students to explain the word one by one in English.
Activity 2. T: Fill in the blanks with the correct form of the words.
Step3 Grammar
Task Learn the use of –ing form as an adverbial.
Activity 1. Study the example:
He was ill and didn’t attend the meeting. →
Being ill, he didn’t attend the meeting.
Activity 2. Compare with another example:
After they enjoy the rides at the Headland, visitors can take a cable car to the Lowland. →
Having enjoyed the rides at the Headland, visitors can take a cable car to the Lowland.
Summary: This Having enjoyed …means the subject has finished an action before he does another. The form is used to emphasize two actions that happen in different times.
Activity 3: Show on the screen some exercises of –ing forms. Have students do the exercises, and explain if there are questions
Step 4 Checkpoint
Activity: Students go through the Checkpoint and do the exercise.
Draw a conclusion of the use of –ing form.
Homework
Finish the word study and grammar part on the workbook.
Read more passages about theme parks.
Period 6 Language points
六、课文语言点注释
*重点词汇和词组
1.attract , attraction
attract vt.吸引，引起（兴趣、注意）
attract sb. ; attract one’s attention / interest
attraction n.指吸引人的事物，吸引力，吸引
What are the chief attractions of tonight’s performance?
2. minority n.少数，少数民族
“少数”反义词: majority
Only a minority of Guangzhou households do not have a car.
be in a/the minority （在投票中）是少数派
We are in the minority. 我们是少数派 （多数人反对我们）
be in one’s minority 未成年
She is in her minority.
3. conversation 谈话
have a pleasant conversation with sb. 与某人谈得好
4. achievement (great success) 成就、成功、伟绩
His flying across the Pacific is a great achievement.
他的飞度太平洋之事是一大伟绩。
achieve vt. 完成、获得 achieve success获得成功,
achieve victory 获得胜利 achieve one’s purpose 达到目的
1. motion n.运动，动作 The ship was in motion. 那轮船在移动。
v. 运动 to motion to sb. 向某人点头或摇手示意
to motion sb. to a seat 以手示意某人坐下
2. imagination n. 想象（力）； 空想； 想象的事物
She has a very strong imagination.
imagine vt. 想象（其后加：名词、动名词、名词性从句）
I can imagine what he looks like.
Can you imagine walking on the moon?
7. experience vt. & n.
experience 用作可数名词，意为“经历；经过的事”。如：
I had an unusual experience last week.
experience 用作不可数名词，意为“经验”：
She has 20 years’ experience in teaching.
experience 用作及物动词，意为“经历，体验”：
Have you ever experience real hunger?
experienced 用作形容词，意为“有经验的”：
Beckham is an experienced football player.
8.have something to do with 与……有关
have nothing ( not much / a great deal) to do with…
与……没有关系( 与……关系不大; 与……关系很大)
9.be based on 以……为基础
Writing is based on words and sentences.
10.give sb.a thrill 使人激动,令人兴奋;令人毛骨悚然
thrill 可用作名词和动词
Her voice thrilled with joy. 她的声音因高兴而发抖。
Skydiving may give the new hand a thrill. …令新手毛骨悚然。
11.a variety of 种种，许多
Iron had a variety of uses.
12.have sth. in common 有共同之处
The two countries have something in common.
***难句理解
1. What they all have in common is having fun and experiencing something different.
这些公园所拥有的共同特点是让人们感到快乐与体验不同的东西。
What they all have in common是主语从句, 其后谓语动词用单数形式。
having fun and experiencing something different 作表语
2. But theme parks also try to make sure that visitors leave knowing more about the idea behind the park.
但是主题公园也尽力去做，使得来访者在离开时已对公园的良苦用心了解更多。
make sure 是“弄确定”意思。
Make sure that the lights have been turned off when you leave the room!
The train leaves at 5 o’clock, but you’d better make sure.
knowing more about the idea behind the park 是现在分词结构作结果状语，表达一定逻辑的结果。
而动词不定式作结果状语通常表达非逻辑的结果。请对比以下句子：
The little boy woke up, unluckily to find his books lost.
I got off the bus, only to find my pocket picked.
3.Having enjoyed the rides at the Headland, visitors can take the shuttle to the Lowland. 在Headland玩了过山车后，游客们可以坐车直接到Lowland。
Having enjoyed the rides at the Headland为现在分词的完成式结构，表达主语的这一动作在下一动作前已经发生并完成，特别强调前后动作在时间上的对比。这个结构可以转换为从句After they have enjoyed the rides at the headland,…
4. Entering one of the attractions at Universal Studios is like stepping into the world of your favourite film.
走进Universal Studios其中一个吸引人的场地就象步入你最喜爱的电影中的一个画面。
Entering one of the attractions at Universal Studios是动名词结构作主语； stepping into the world of your favourite film是动名词结构作宾语。
动名词结构可以作主语、宾语、表语、状语、定语、独立成分和同位语等。
5.It seemed like people just cannot get enough of scary rides and exciting adventures. 看来人们从这样的惊险赛车和刺激冒险活动中还得不到足够的满足。此处用It seemed that …句式更为正式。seem的用法如下：
6.You can feel what it is like to live in space, walk on the ocean floor or ski with polar bears at North Pole.
你可以感觉到如同居住在太空、在海底行走或在北极和北极熊一同滑雪那样的情况。
feel后面跟了宾语从句what it is like to live in space, walk on the ocean floor or ski with polar bears at North Pole。
what it is like to do sth.表达事物情况如何。
7. The only limit to the fun is the imagination of the designers of the thrill rides. It seems to be endless.
对于这种乐趣的唯一限制是惊险车乘的设计者的想象力。设计工作是无穷无尽的。（这2句话表明一个事实：个人的想象力是有限的但又不断发展变化的，想象活动是无止境的，想象是创造的基础。）
此处limit作名词。
The …limit of something / to something is ……也是一个常用句型。
Period 7 grammer points
现在分词作状语的用法
1、表示时间
Walking across the bridge, the painter made preparations for his painting.
走过桥时，这位画家在为他的画准备内容。
2、表示原因
Hearing the cry for help, the soldiers rushed out of the building.
战士们听到外面的呼救声就冲出了房子。
3、表示状态
I was in the room watching TV when the earthquake happened.
地震发生时我正在房间里看电视。
4、表示方式
The whale looks for food using sound waves.
鲸鱼通过声波寻找食物。
5、表示条件
Our class may go to the West Lake tomorrow, depending on the weather.
我们明天可以去西湖看看，那要看天气情况了。
6、表示结果
A lot of good soil has gone with the floods, leaving only sand.
许多泥土被水冲走了，仅仅留下了沙子。
篇10：高一英语第七单元完整教案(人教版高一英语下册教案教学设计)
Warming up & Listening
Type of lesson: Warming up & listening
Teaching aims: 1.Talk about cultural relics, their importance and ways to protect them.
2.To improve the ability of listening.
Teaching aids:Tape recorder, paper sheet, projector
Teaching procedures:
Step I. Warming up.
Task 1:Team work on the topic “cultural relics”.
Q1:What does the topic mean? Have you got any ideas of cultural relics?
Q2:Are there any cultural relics in Beijing? Name some.
Task 2:Talk about the given cultural relics.
Q1:What are they? Where are they?
Q2:Which one would you like to visit? Why?
I would like to visit _________ because ____________.
I think it’s famous for __________________________.
Q3:What do you think of the cultural relics ? What can we do to protect them? Let’s listen to a passage and see what are mentioned in it.
Step II. Listening.
1. Ask the students to read the chart on P43 before listening and find out what they are asked to fill in the chart.
2. Listen to the passage for the first time and then ask the Ss to tell the names of the sites orally.
3. Listen to the passage for two or three times and try to say something about the importance of each place.(Check in pairs and then in class)
1) _______,there is a statue of a horse._______, there is a large stone elephant.The main building is _______.This site is important because it tells us about what kind of buildings people had in the past.
A. On the left B .in the centre C. On the right
2) This beautiful temple stands between a lake and a mountain. The temple is an important part of our history; many important things happened here, and many poems have been written about the temple.
3) People come to Mt. Lu Shan to look at the beautiful mountains and waterfalls .Over there, between Red Sun Mountain and the lake is the Blue Waterfall ,one of the biggest in the area. Between the lake and the village is the Moon Tower. The mountain is an important part of China’s history and important people have been here.
4. Listen to the passage for another two times and try to find out the measures people take to protect the places.
(Do the matching exercise)
Protect the palace build a museum
walk around the house
Protect the temple limit the number of cars
build a wall
Protect the mountain move some to the museum
try to use buses
5. Ask the Ss to read the pictures on P44 and the instructions, too. And then listen to the passage again to complete the exercise.
6. Discuss the answers in pairs and then check them in class.
Step III. Ask the Ss to do talking exercise on P121 in a group of five. And two or three groups will present their decision in the next class. The other groups have to write down their decision.
( 教师应给每组评分。小组之间互评，每组每个人有口语成绩的一并积累。)
Speaking:
Type of lesson: Speaking
Teaching aims:1.To learn how to ask for and make suggestions.
2.To help the Ss make dialogues in proper situations.
3. To encourage the Ss to discuss in groups and develop their imagination and creativity.
Key point: To help them use the functional sentences correctly in proper situations.
Teaching aids: Tape recorder, pictures and some real objects.
Teaching procedures:
Step I. Ask the Ss to read the instructions.
Step II. Help the Ss understand the instructions.
. 1.Q1:What kind of box is the culture capsure? (about 2*2 metres / an imaginary large box)
Q2:Shall I put in a cat?(No, you can’t put any living things in the capsure.)
(No, the object you’ve chosen should represent Chinese culture.)
Q3:Shall I put a bowl?(Yes, but it should have some cultural value, For example,it was made in Qing Dynasty.)
2.Ss discuss in groups and fill in the form.
What do you want to put in? Why?
3..Ask the Ss to make up their own dialogue by using the functional sentences.
Step III. Ask the Ss to sum up some useful expressions.
Asking for suggestions:
1)What shall I do …?
2)Can’t we do …?
3)Should we do …?
Making suggestions:
1)What/How about…?
2)Why not…?
3)Why don’t you…?
4)I think you’d better do… .
5)I suggest you (should) do … .
6)Let’s do … .
7)I’d like to do… .
8)Maybe we could do … .
Step IV. Ask the Ss to present pairwork on the culture capsure.(Act out their dialogues).
Step V. Ask the Ss to make up a new dialogue with the useful expressions above in a group of four.
Situation:
You are going to hold an evening party. You haven’t decided the place, the time and the guests you’re going to invited. Now, you are talking about the party with your family.
Step VI. Ss present their decision.
Step VII. Homework .
Write down the dialogues they have made up.
Reading:
Type of lesson: Reading
Teaching aims:1.To help the students to have a good understanding of the text
2.To train the students’ reading ability
3.To solve their difficulties by reading, discussing and doing exercises
Teaching procedures:
Step I. Lead in.
1. Ask the Ss to say something about the standard of Great cities.
T: There are many great cities in the world. In your opinion, what makes a city great? Let’s take Beijing as an example.(见课件)
1) a long history
2) the capital of the country
3) a large population
4) Something important once took place there.
5) many places of interests
6) …….
2. Show the pictures of famous rivers in the world and introduce St.Petersburg.
T: Water is important for human beings ,here is a proverb saying,” Where there is a river, there is a city.” Maybe it’s not always true. But it’s true that many of the world’s greatest cities have been built on the banks of a river.
Now,I want to show some pictures of famous rivers in the world. And all of them flow through famous cities in the world.
1) The Yangzi River ------Nanjing
2) The Thames River ----- London
3) The Newa River----- St.Petersburg
1) The Yangzi River
2)The Thames River
3) The Newa River
T : Do you know the city of St.Petersburg? It’s the second largest city in Russia. And it’s 300 anniversaries of this city this year. The same as Beijing, St.Petersburg experiences many famous events in history. Until now St. Petersburg , as one of the oldest and the most well-known cities in the world, still keep making legends .So today let’s learn about this city,” A City of Heroes”, St. Petersburg.
Step II. Help the Ss to understand the passage.
1. Ask the Ss to read the title and find out what the passage is about.
The text must be about a city which has many heroes.
2. Do fast reading to find out the answers to the following three questions.
Q1:Which city will the text talk about?
Q2:Who are heroes?
Q3:Who is the man on the bronze horse?
3. Ask the Ss to read the text aloud with the tape, and then finish True or False Statements. (WB P68)
4.Help the Ss to deal with the difficult points.
1) Match the words on the left with their meaning on the right.
cave make something as good as it was before
project to build again; construct anew
ruin artist; person who paints pictures
ancient very old; from a long time ago
.portrait break or harm something
damage a picture that you take with a camera
rebuild a painting or picture of a person
restore a big plan to do something
painter a building that has been deadly damaged
photograph a large hole in the side of a mountain or under the ground
2) Help the Ss to understand the following sentences.
a. Pieces of the palaces that had been hidden before the Germans came could be used to rebuild the city and its culture.
b. With the help of old paintings and photographs, the people of St.Petersburg were able to bring back the beauty of their culture and history.
c. The palaces are large and beautiful, and they often look like something out of a fairy tale.
4. Ask the Ss to summarize each paragragh with one or two words.
St.Petersburg
Para 1: the building of the city
Para 2: the decline of the city
Para 3: the rebuilding of the city
Para 4: the present situation of the city
5. Ask the Ss to have a discussion on the chart in a group of four, and then ask some of them to fill in the chart.
Work sheet:
the building of the city
position
creator
personality of Peter the Great
the decline of the city (important historical events)
time
how long
intruder
the results of the Nazis’failure
the rebuilding of the city
materials
difficulties
the result of hard work
the present situation of the city
the modern heroes of Russia
the character of people of St.Petersburg
Step III. Ask the Ss to do post-reading exercises.
1.Discuss the questions in pairs.
Q1: Why are the people of St. Petersburg heroes?
Q2: Why do people think St. Petersburg is a great city?
2.Ss present their opinions in class and then the teacher makes a summary.
T: From the text we just learned, we can see that St. Petersburg, this great city, has a lot of history. In the past, Peter the Great was the hero of St. Petersburg. Now the people of St. Petersburg are keeping on making legend of St. Petersburg, even the legend of whole Russia. As a result, strong, proud and united, the people of St. Petersburg are the real modern heroes of Russia.
Step IV. Communication exercise.
Task: Talk about the celebrations of the city held in the city this July.
Step V. Homework.
1. Find out more information of the city on the Internet. Report it to the class in the written form.
2. Finish Ex.2 on Students’ Book P46.
Answer sheet:
the building of the city
position on the banks of the Newa River
creator the Russion Czar Peter the Great
personality of Peter the Great strong and proud
the decline of the city (important historical events)
time 1941
how long 900 days
intruder Germans (Nazis)
the results of the Nazis’failure 1.fires burned everywhere
2.buildings destroyed
3.paintings and stutues lay in pieces on the ground
the rebuilding of the city
materials 1.pieces of palaces that had hidden before the Nazis came
2.the old paintings and photograghs
difficulties save the buildings and palaces without destroying their old beauty
the result of hard work 1.Parts of statues have been put back together.
2.Missing pieces have been replaced.
3.Old paintings and the old palaces have been made as wonderful as in the past.
the present situation of the city
the modern heroes of Russia the people of St. Petersburg
the character of people of St.Petersburg strong, proud and united
Word Study
Type of lesson: Word study
Teaching aims:1. Help the Ss use some key words and expressions in this unit.
2.Help the Ss to know how to build a word with “re”.
Key point: Master how to use the key words and expressions in different situations.
Teaching procedures:
Sept I. Ask the Ss to find out the sentences with the words and expressions in the text and read them out.
Step II. Ask the Ss to read more examples and sum up the usage.
Step III . Ss do the exercises.
Step IV. Check the answers .
Step V. Homework.
1)Ask the Ss to make up a short passage with the words and expressions learnt in this unit.
2)Review the whole unit.
I.Word formation “re- “
1.Find out the words with “re-“ in the text and understand the meaning.
A prefix is a syllable that is added to the beginning of base word to change its meaning. In the text, prefix “re” means again .
2.Do Ex.1 on P46.
II. Word study.
1. use 的用法 (vt. & n.)
1) Are you using this knife or can I borrow it?
2) This glass has been used. Please fetch me a clean one.
3) Bamboo can be used to build houses.
4) These lights are used for illuminating the playing area.(赛场)
5) This grammar book can be used as a textbook..
6) A food processor has a variety of uses in the kitchen. (n.)
7) Don’t throw that cloth away. You’ll find a use for it one day.(n.)
8) It’s no use arguing with him any more. He won’t listen to you.(no use doing sth.)
9) If you don’t have enough money, You are able to buy a used car instead of a new one.
( A past participle can be used as an adjective.)
Exercise:
1. The old hospital _____________.( 已经不再使用了)
2. Computers should be designed for the people who _______________.(使用它们 )
3. It’s no use _________________( 帮助他学英语).He doesn’t want to learn it well at all.
4. She hurt her arm in the fall and _____________( 失去作用) of her fingers.
2. It is true that many of the world’s greatest cities have built on the banks of a river. (It + be + adj./n./p.p. +to do/ that ….)
It was difficult to save the palaces and buildings without changing their old beauty.
1)Is it true that the scientist will give us a lecture next week?
2)It is said that at least ten buildings will be built soon in our city.
3)It is easy to recite the text.
4)It’s a rule in our school to do a good cleaning on Friday.
Complete sentences.
1)据报道，一些外宾明天要到我校参观.( reported )
____ _____ _____ many foreign guests will visit our school.
2)行这次会议，意义重大。（ important; of great importance）
a. To hold the conference is ____ ____ ____.
b.___ ____ ____ to hold the conference.
3.give up /give in
1)She gave up her job to look after her sick mother.
2)He has to give up playing football because of his broken left leg. .
3)You can’t win the game ,so you may as well give in.
Exercise:
1) The doctor told him to _________ smoking because he had coughed for a long time.
2) The enemy is surrounded ,and will soon ____________.
3) He has to _______ drinking whisky because he suffers from heart attack.
4.
look out, look after, look at, look up, look for
1) If you have new words, you should ________ the words in your dictionary.
2) Peter _______ his pen , but he didn’t find it.
3) _________, a car may hit you!
4) A good doctor should _________his patients very carefully.
5) Mary _______ the blackboard , but she could see nothing .
5. try to do/ have to do/ be able to do
1)We ______ remember the useful words and expressions in this unit in five minutes, but we failed..
2)She wasn’t ____________ go to the games because she hurt her right knee a week ago.
3)The workers ___________ stay up all night in order to finish the work on time.
6.seem 的用法见教参P145
1) It seems that it’s more difficult for women to get to the top of a company.
2) It seems that he is lying.
3) I seem to have seen her before.
4) It seems that he is angry. =He seems to be angry.
5) It seems as if/though he were in a dream.
6) It seems (as if) there will be an election soon.
Rewrite the following sentences.
1) It seems that he is an expert. He seems _____________________.
2) He seems to know everything. It seems _____________________.
III. Complete the passage with the suitable phrases.
try to, be able to, use, it +be+ important, have to
Karl Marx was born in Germany and his mother tongue was German . When he was still a young man he _had to leave his mother land. In 1849,he started working hard to learn his English because it was widely used all around the world. He made such rapid progress that before long he was able to write articles in English for an American newspaper. When he was in his fifties, he found that it was important to study the situation in Russia. So he began to learn Russian. Half a year later, he could read articles and reports in Russian. “ When people use the language, they should try to forget all about their own.” Such was Marx’s suggestion on how to learn a foreign language.
Grammar
Type of lesson: Grammar
Teaching aim: Ss will be able to understand the meaning of the Present Perfect Passive Voice and its functions.
Teaching focus: Ss can use the voice in a proper situation.
Teaching aid: Paper sheet, pictures or projector
Teaching procures:
Step I. Lead in.
Show some pictures to help the Ss to understand the meaning of the voice.
1)The window has been broken .
2)A new school building has been built for a month.
3) Look, the dirty table has been cleared.
Step II. Ask the Ss to find out the sentences with the Present Perfect Passive Voice in the text and tell why the passive voice is used.
Explain these sentences are used :
1) When the doer is unknown (Sentence 1)
2) When the doer is not important (Sentence 2)
3) When we want to highlight the object of the active sentence(Sentence 3)
Step III. Observe the functions of the voice.
Ask the Ss to read more examples and sum up the structures.
1)All the tickets for the International Music Festival have been sold out.
2)Whose homework hasn’t been handed in?
3)Has the building been completed?
肯定式Have/has been done
否定式Have/has not been done
疑问式Have/has…been done
Step IV. Practise using the voice.
1) Do exercise on P49 (checkpoint) and then do Ex.1 on P47.
2) Do Ex.2 on P123.
3) Do Ex.2 on P47.
Step IV. Practise the voice.
1) I see a lot of trees on the street .The trees _____ _____ planted for years.
2) Anybody who cuts down young trees _____ ______ punished.
3) I can’t enter the building because it ______ _____ locked on Sunday morning.
4) A museum ____ ____ built for cultural relics in the village.
5) Many measures _____ _____ taken to protect cultural relics in China ,so we are able to see many places with their original (最初的) looks.
Step VI. Homework.
1. Finish Ex.2 on P63 in the workbook.
2. Do Ex.3 on P123.Observe the examples first and then do the exercise.
Integrating skills
Type of lesson: Reading and writing
Teaching aim: Enable the Ss to improve the ability of reading and writing
Teaching aid: projector, paper sheet, tape recorder
Teaching procedures:
Step I. Ask the Ss to fill in the form after reading the text.
1. Do it individually.
2. Discuss in pairs.
Location feelings problems suggestions
Step II. Ask the Ss to learn to write a letter to an editor.
1. Find out what they want to write about individually.
2.Write it by themselves.
3.Exchange their letters.
4.Present their letters in class.
Step III. A writing task.
The Yellow Mountain is a place of interests, a great many travelers visit it every day. You traveled there on National Day and had a pleasant time. However, you were not satisfied with some behaviors（行为）. Now, you are writing to the management office (管理处) according to the given information in the chart.
Problems Suggestions
throw about the rubbish take away
kill wild animals, catch birds stop hunting
pick flowers protect plants
do the cooking in the wood take meals, forest fire
Possible version:
Dear Editor,
I’m a visitor from Beijing. I traveled to the Yellow Mountain on National day and had a pleasant time there. However, I found some problems during my journey. Some tourists threw about waste paper, plastic bags and tins. Some killed wild animals, caught birds and picked up flowers. Some even did the cooking in the wood.
As we know, the Yellow Mountain is a place of interests. A great many travelers visit it every day. In my opinion, the travelers should take away rubbish with them when they leave. They should stop hunting and plants should be protected .What’s more, all the tourists should take their meals in order not to cause forest fire.
Yours sincerely,
Alice
篇11：人教版高一下册考点透视(人教版高一英语下册教案教学设计)
作者：浙江省富阳市新登中学 傅代红 胡君祥
联系电话：13083971266 邮编：311404
办公室电话：0571-63218205
人教版高一（下）册所涉及到的语法点、单词、短语、句型结构很多，下面就人教版高一（下）的重点语法点、单词、短语、句型结构结合近几年高考试题做如下透视。
1. Only in that way will we be ready for the challenges and opportunities in life. (Unit13 Page4 Reading)
[考点] only ＋状语＋部分倒装句
[归纳] only ＋状语位于句首时，应使用部分倒装，即“only＋状语＋助动词＋主语＋实义动词”， 如含有状语从句，倒装应出现在主句部分。 “only ＋主语”位于句首时不用倒装。
[高考链接]
1). _________ by keeping down costs will Power Data hold its advantage over other companies. (06浙江9)
A. Only B. Just C. Still D. Yet
2). Only then ________how much damage had been caused. (06 陕西)
A. she realized B. she had realized
C. had she realized D. did she realize
2. Organic vegetables are those that are grown without chemicals that can be harmful to human beings or the environment. (Unit13 Page4 Reading)
[考点] “can＋do” 在陈述句中表推测
[归纳] can表推测时一般不用于陈述句，这指的是对具体某事的推测。对一种普遍性规律进行推测时，can还是可以用于陈述句中的。
[高考链接] Some aspects of a pilot’s job ______be boring, and pilots often _____work at inconvenient hours.（06湖南）
A. can; have to B. may; can
C. have to; may D. ought to; must
3. Kwanzaa is a seven-day festival celebrating the cultural and history of African Americans. (Unit14 Page10 Reading)
[考点] 分词作定语
[归纳] 作定语的及物动词分词形式为：v.-ing; being＋过去分词;过去分
词。当被修饰的名词与分词为主动关系时，用v.-ing；为被动关系且表正在进行时，用being＋过去分词；为被动关系且表完成时，用过去分词。
[高考链接] The wild flowers looked like a soft orange blanket__________ the desert. （06湖南）
A. covering B. covered C. cover D. to cover
4. Each time we celebrate a festival it changes a little and in that way we keep our cultural alive. (Unit14 Page 11 Reading)
[考点] 含有time的结构引导时间状语从句
[归纳]近年来对状语从句的引导词的考查转向each time类名词短语和
immediately等副词的趋势，应特别总结相关用法。含有time等名词引导时间状语从句的结构有：every time，each time，next time，the first time，the moment，the minute，the instant。
[高考链接] ______ we made mistakes in our homework, he would ask
us to correct them. (05 全国卷)
A. Each time B. each time when C. A time D. One time
5. So I called on you and asked if I could borrow some jewellery. (Unit15Page17 Reading)
[考点] call的常用短语
[归纳] call on意为“拜访；访问；号召”， call up意为“征召；唤起：使人忆起；带入心中”， call off意为“取消”， call for意为“要求；需要”， call in意为“回收；邀请”。
[高考链接] As I grew up in a small town at the foot of a mountain, the visit to the village ______scenes of my childhood. (06 湖北)
A. called up B. called for C. called on D. called in
6. Well, I would rather not tell you. (Unit15Page17 Reading)
[考点] would rather 用法
[归纳] would rather 用法要注意4点：1. 否定式为would rather not；
2. 反义疑问句为wouldn’t＋主语；3.后接从句时，从句要使用过去时；4. 表示宁愿做什么胜过做什么时为would rather do…than do。
[高考链接] 29.I’m sure you’d rather she went to school by bus, _______?
(06福建)
A. hadn’t you B. wouldn’t you C. aren’t D. didn’t she
7. In the eighteenth century, Benjamin Franklin conduced a number of experiments in which he showed what electricity is. (Unit16 Page24 Reading)
[考点] a number of与the number of作主语
[归纳] a number of接复数名词做主语，谓语动词用复数；而the number of接复数名词做主语，谓语动词用单数。
[高考链接]
1). As you can see, the number of cars on our roads _______ rising these days.
(06全国Ⅱ)
A. keep B. has been keeping C. have been keeping D. are keeping
2). Nowadays, a large number of women, especially those from the countryside,
_______ in the clothing industry. (05 辽宁)
A. work B. works C. is working D. has worked
8. Having realized that I could use a kite to attract lighting, I decided to do an experiment. (Unit16 Page 24 Reading)
Tie the corners of the handkerchief to the points of the cross, and you will have a nice strong kite. (Unit16 Page 24 Reading)
To make as much use of the land as possible, two or more crops are planted each year where possible. (Unit 19 Page45 Reading)
[考点] 句首动词的形式
[归纳] 句首动词的考查主要测试非谓语动词以及祈使句的掌握情况。注意：句子是否是祈使句；非谓语动词作状语是否表目的，是正在发生还是已经发生，是主动还是被动。
[高考链接]
1). _______ in the queue for half an hour, Tom suddenly realized that he had left his wallet at home. (05 全国卷)
A. Having waited B. Wait C. Waiting D. Waited
2). _______for the breakdown of the school computer network, Alice was in low spirits. (06 福建)
A. Blame B. To be blamed C. To blame D. Blamed
3). _______ this cake, you will need 2 eggs. （05 全国卷II）
A. Make B. Making C. Having made D. To make
4). _______ straight on and you will see a church. You won’t miss it.
A. Go B. Going C. To go D. Having gone (05 湖北)
5). ______ more about university courses, call (920) 746-3769. (05 浙江)
A. To find out B. Finding out C. Find out D. Having found out
6). ______ the employees' working efficiency, the supervisor will allow them to have a coffee break. （07 上海春季）
A. Improving B. To improve C. Having improved D. Improved
9. Another journey of challenge and danger was about to begin. (Unit 17 Page 31 Reading)
[考点] 有后置定语的名词短语作主语的主谓一致
[归纳] 有后置定语的名词短语作主语时谓语应与前面名词保持一致
[高考链接]
1). The construction of the two new railway lines _______ by now. （陕西）
A. has completed B. have completed
C. have been completed D. has been completed
2). We live day by day, but in the great things, the time of days and weeks _____
so small that a day is unimportant. ( 湖南)
A. is B. are C. has been D. have been
10. I had traveled just two hours one day when the windows increased so much that I had to put my tent up before the winds became too strong. (Unit17 Page 31 Reading)
[考点] when意为“这时”
[归纳] when意为“这时”，与之搭配的有3种：1.be about to do（正要去做）； 2. be doing（正在做）；3. had (just) done（刚做完）。
[高考链接] I had just stepped out of the bathroom and was busily drying myself with a towel ________ I heard the steps. （06 湖南）
A. while B. when C. since D. after
11. I had to think of my family, which is very important to me, and do the right thing. I did so without regret. (Unit17 Page32 Reading)
[考点] so构成的缩略句
[归纳] so构成的缩略句可分为3类：1. so＋主语＋动词 （表示进一步的肯定）； 2. so＋动词＋主语（表示另外某人也怎么样）； 3. 主语＋动词＋so（表示某人按照…去做）。
[高考链接]
1). ---It’s burning hot today, isn’t it? ----Yes. ________ yesterday. (2006 福建)
A. So was it B. So it was C. So it is D. So is it
2). ---I reminded you not to forget the appointment.
--- ____________. (06江西)
A. So you did B. So I do not C. So did you D. So do I
3). -Father, you promised! (05湖北)
-Well, _______. But it was you who didn’t keep your word first.
A. so was I B. so did I C. so I was D. so I did
12. In her television shows Oprah Winfrey makes it possible to talk about great moments and difficulties in people’s lives. (Unit17 Page34 Reading)
[考点] it作形式宾语
[归纳] it作形式宾语，真正的宾语可以是不定式、从句、名词短语等。
[高考链接] As the busiest woman in Norton, she made_____ her duty to look after all the other people’s affairs in that town.（2006湖南）
A. this B. that C. one D. it
13. New Zealand has a mild sea climate, while the north is subtropical. (Unit18 Page38 Reading)
While(尽管，虽然) there are many different interpretations of our body language, some gestures seem to be universal. （Unit21 Page59 Reading）
[考点] while作为连词的用法
[归纳] while作为连词有3种意思：“而；却”、“当…时”、“虽然”。
[高考链接]
1). I do very single bit of housework _______ my husband Bob just does the dishes now and then. (04 全国卷Ⅲ)
A. when B. however C. while D. although
2). _______ I accept that he is not perfect, I do actually like the person. (04 江苏)
A. While B. Since C. Before D. Unless
14. The Maori were the earliest people to come to New Zealand. When they discovered it about 1,000 years ago, they called it Aotearoa. (Unit18 Page38 Reading)
[考点] it 与one用作代词的区别
[归纳] it用作代词指代某一具体的东西或事情，属于同指， 且在口语
中可省略。而one作代词时为类指。
[高考链接]
1). If I can help_______, I don't like working late into the night. (06 全
国卷)
A. so B. that C. it D. them
2). I prefer a flat in Inverness to ______ in Perth, because I want to live near my Mom’s. （05 天津）
A. one B. it C. this D. the one
3). --- I was wondering if we could go skiing on the weekend.
--- _______good. (06 湖北)
A. Sound B. Sounded C. Sounding D. Sounds
15. Future agriculture should depend on high technology as well as traditional methods. (Unit19 Page46 Reading)
[考点] depend用法
[归纳] depend构成的短语搭配为depend on，无被动语态； 交际用语中it (all) depends意思为“（一切）视情况而定”。
[高考链接] ----How long are you staying?
----I don't know.___________. (04 江苏)
A. That's OK B. Never mind C. It depends D. It doesn't matter
16. The temperature is controlled with computers, no matter how the
weather is outside.
[考点] no matter＋疑问词
[归纳] no matter＋疑问词只能引导让步状语从句，而whatever, whoever, wherever, however既能替代no matter＋疑问词引导让步状语从句, 也可以引导名词性从句。
[高考链接]
1). This is a very interesting book. I’ll buy it, ________. （06陕西）
A. how much may it cost B. no matter how it may cost
C. however much it may cost D. how may it cost
2). ____ team wins on Saturday will go through to the national championships.（06山东）
A. No matter what B. No matter which
C. Whatever D. whichever
3). You should try to get a good night’s sleep ______ much work you
have to do . (04 湖北)
A. however B. no matter C. although D. whatever
17. Dating back to the Qin Dynasty (221-207BC), the traditional crosstalk shows, or xiangsheng shows, have made people all over China roar with laughter for centuries. (Unit20 Page53 Reading)
[考点] traditional与historic
[归纳] traditional意为“传统的”；historic意为“历史的”。
[高考链接]
In ______ Chinese culture, marriage decisions were often made by
parents for their children. (04 上海)
A. traditional B. historic C. remote D. initial
18. It is their clothes, make-up and the way they walk that make people laugh. (Unit20 Page52 Reading)
[考点] way后接定语从句
[归纳] way后接定语从句关系词的选用分为2种情况：1. 关系词在
定语从句充当主语、宾语时用that或which 2. 关系词在定语从句中充当状语时用in which或that或不用。
[高考链接] It was not what you said but the way you spoke ______ surprised me.
A. in which ; what B. which ; that C. 不填；that D. that ; what
19. A smile can help us get through difficult situations and find friends in a world of strangers. (Unit21 Page60 Reading)
[考点] get的常用短语
[归纳] get through意为“完成；接通电话”， get across意为“使了解；使信服”， get about意为“可以走动”， get away意为“走开；离开；脱身；逃脱”， get back意为“归还；返回”。
[高考链接]
1). ---The boss said we had only three days to finish the work.
---Don’t worry. We have already two thirds of it. (06 四川)
A. got down B. got through C. given in D. given away
2). I couldn’t ______. The line was busy. (05 浙江)
A. go by B. go around C. get in D. get through
20. So if you want to know what it feels like to fall through the air, take off in a rocket, fly a helicopter or fight alien creatures in outer space, visit one of the theme parks in your area. If there isn’t one where you live yet, don’t worry, the theme parks are coming. (Unit22 Page67 Reading)
[考点] take的常用短语及现在进行时的特殊用法
[归纳] take短语的用法历来是高考重要考查点，近5年来共考了7题。take off意为“脱掉（衣服等）；松开；带走；走开；离开；起飞；取消”；take in意为“吸收”；take for意为“误认为”；take down意为“拿下；放下”。少数一些瞬间性动词用进行时并不表动作正在进行，而是表示不久将要发生的事。
[高考链接] Ladies and gentlemen, please fasten your seat belts. The plane _______. (06 福建)
A. takes off B. is taking off C. has taken off D. took off
篇12：高一（下）全套教案(人教版高一英语下册教案教学设计)
高一（下）教案
Unit 13
Teaching Aids：Individual,pair or group work to make every student work in class.
1.Aims of knowledge: Learn and master the phrases
2.Ability aims:
1．Train the student’s reading ability.
2．Develop the students’speaking ability by describing, talking and discussion.
1. Moral aims:
Enable the students to understand the best way to make sure that we will fell and look fine is to develop healthy eating habits by learning the reading text.
Teaching important points:
1. Improve the student’s reading ability.
2. Master the following phrase: keep up with, too much, make choices, be harmful to, lose weight, be prepared for.
Teaching difficult points:
How to make the students understand the reading material better and answer some questions on the passage.
Teaching Aids:1.a tape recorder2.a slide projecto3.a computer for multimedia use
Teaching steps:
Step 1 Lead-in
Six essential nutrients:
1. protein
2. carbohydrate
3. fat
4. vitamins
5. minerals
6. water
Do you know them and their functions?
Step 2 Tell the key meaning of each paragraph. (Find out the topic sentence of each paragraph.)
Para 1 Snacks give us energy.
Pa 2 When we choose what to buy and eat, we had better think whether the food will give us the nutrients we need.
Pa 3 Many people today make choices about their eating habits based on what they believe.
Pa 4 It is probably better if we spend our time and money on buying good food and keep a balanced diet.
Pa 5 The best way to make sure that we will feel and look fine is to develop healthy eating habits.
(Para1. Sentence1
Para2 Sentence2
Para3 Sentence2
Para4 Sentence3
para5 Sentence1)
Step 2 Fast-reading
1.What does the “fuel ” mean in the first paragraph?
(It means different kinds of materials, such as protein, Calcium that we need to keep healthy.)
2.What do we have to consider when we choose to buy or eat?
(What kinds of nutrients that the foods contain.)
3.What made our eating habit changing?
(Many things: what people believe, advice from companies and stores.)
4. How can we feel and look fine?
(We ought to learn about our body and the fuel it needs to keep fit.)
Explain the language points if necessary.
5. What are the causes of people’s choice of eating habits?
Based on Nutrition: protein, calcium, etc.
what they believe-vegetarians / vegans
how the products are grown or made ---- organic vegetables
6.What’s enviornmentally friendly food?
Eco-food. It is produced by companies who have tried to use green and clean ways to grow it.
7.What are organic vegetables?
Vegetables grown without chemicals that can be harmful to human beings or the enviornment.
8.Why do some people become vegetarians?
Because they believe it is healthier not to eat meat or because they think we should not kill animals for food.
9..What’s the difference between vegetarians and vegans?
Vegetarians don’t eat meat but vegans will not eat any animal products at all.
10. According to the passage, how can we keep fit?
Spend our time and money on buying good food and keeping a balanced diet. Eat healthy food in the right amounts.
11. what’s “crash diets” ?
It is something that some companies say will make us lose weight fast.
12.According to the passage, how can we lose weight?
Try to eat less fat and sugar and exercise more.
Step 3.Skimming
Paragraph 1 (T or F)
1.Choosing what to eat is not as easy as it once was any longer.
2.Our eating habits have changed while our way of life has not changed.
3.21-century people prefer traditional food very much.
4,we had better learn to make right choices about food to keep up with the high pace of modern life.
Para2.
Nutrients Function Sources
protein Good for our muscle Fish, meat and beans
calcium Good for our bones Eggs, milk and other dairy products
Carbohydrates Main fuel for our body Bread, rice and noodles
Vitamins fiber ,minerals Fight disease, keep our functioning well Vegetables, fruits, fish and milk
Step 4 Carefully-reading
--How many parts can be divided into
--Three parts.
--What’s the main idea of each part?
1.our eating habits are changing.
2.why the eating habits are changing the best way to develop healthy eating habits？
Step 5 Post-reading
1 what does the word “fuel” and “ green” mean in the text?
Fuel here means the food we need to keep our bodies healthy and active. Green foods are organic foods ,that is, foods are grown and produced naturally.
2. How have our eating habits changed?
We are busier than in past years so we now have less time to eat than before.
Work in pairs and discuss the following questions
1 ) Why do people go to fast food restaurants?
People go to fast food restaurants because they are quick and convenient.
2) Why is it not good for you to eat much sugar and fat?
Too much sugar and fat will make you as big as a whale.
Step 6 Retelling the text
no longer, as easy as, change, keep up with, make the right choices give the nutrients , build our body, be good for keep our body functioning well, fight disease Make choices, based on, become part of become vegetarians, how the products are grown Choose from, give advice, keep a balanced diet instead of, exercise develop healthy eating habits, be ready for
Step 7 Homework
1. Finish Period 2 in Winner.
2. Recite the following sentence.
1) You ought to be careful with fruit.
2) Take this medicine three medicine three times a day.
3) I advise you not to eat fruit that is not ripe in the future.
3.Finish Post Reading exercises at Page 4
Unit 14
Step 1 Lead-in
THE BIRTH OF A FESTIVAL
We have known many festivals,such as Christmas, Spring Festival, Mid-Autumn Day, and so on.
Step 2 Pre-reading
1. Make a comparison of Chinese Spring Festival and Christian Christmas.
T: Which is the greatest and the most important festival to Chinese people? (the Spring Festival) And which is the greatest and the most important festival to Christian people in western countries? (Christmas)
Both of them are quite popular in the world. What are the differences between them?
Festival
aspects Chinese Spring Festival
Christmas
Time From the 1st day to the 15th day of the first Chinese lunar month On Dec. 25
Preparation Do spring cleaning, do Spring Festival shopping (new clothes, delicious food, fireworks, New Year paintings, etc.), decorate the houses with Spring Festival couplets, paper cuts, Chinese knots… Do cleaning, do Christmas shopping (gifts, cards, sweet, cookies, etc.), decorate the houses with Christmas tree and colored lights…
Special Food New Year’s cake, dumpling ( jiaozi) , sweet dumpling (tangyuan)… Candies, cookies, pudding…
Gifts Anything (foods, fruits, clothes, drinks…) Anything (foods, fruits, drinks, desserts,Christmasdecorations)
Major Activities Have family reunion dinner on New Year’s Eve, pay New Year’s visits, recreational activities (dragon dance, lion dance, stilt-walking…) Family reunion, have a big dinner on Christmas Eve…
purpose Bidding farewell to the old year and welcoming the new year, hoping for the best and the good future. Celebrating the birth of Jesus Christ
Note: The italicized words in the form above are suggested answers.
Step 3 Reading
T: Do you know there is another festival which follows Christmas Day in America. It is an important festival to African Americans. Is there any one who knows the name of the festival? SS:Kwanzaa.
1.Fast reading: Read the text on page 10 fast and try to get a general idea of Kwanzaa from the text.
What’s the topic sentence of the paragraph 1?
Kwanzaa is a seven-day festival celebrating the culture and history of African Americans.
T can present a diagram of the information about Kwanzaa to help Ss to finish this task.
Questionnaire: When is Kwanzaa celebrated? How long does it last?
Who created the festival of Kwanzaa? (Dr Maulana Karenga) Who usually celebrates Kwanzaa? Why is it celebrated? What are the characteristics of Kwanzaa?)
Step 4 Careful reading:
Get Ss to read the text carefully to get more details. After reading, Ss are asked to do True or False exercises.
1) African Americans have a long history and a rich culture, so Kwanzaa is an old festival. ( F ) (a young festival)
2) People created Kwanzaa to celebrate American culture. ( F ) ( to celebrate African culture)
3) The word Kwanzaa means first fruit in Swahili, one of the largest languages in Africa. ( T )
4) The African first-fruit festivals are completely different from each other. ( F ) ( to have many things in common )
5) Kwanzaa is celebrated on Christmas Day. ( F ) ( from Dec. 26 to Jan. 1 )
6) Kwanzaa is based on old African festivals. ( T )
7) People who celebrate Kwanzaa light a candle for each of the seven principles. ( T )
Do you know any festivals for black people or African Americans?
Questions:
1What’s the name of the festival?
2When did the festival begin?
3What time do people celebrate it every year?
4What’s the meaning of the Kwanzaa?And which language did the name come form?
5How many principle does Kwanzaa have?
6.What things did the African first-fruit festivals have in common?
People would get together to celebrate their harvest,to give thanks for their harvests and for life, to honour their ancestors, celebrate their past, and the group or society they lived in.
Step 4 Discussion
Topic1: Do you agree festivals can help us understand our history and culture? How do they help us understand our history and culture?
Topic2: Nowadays more and more festivals have been created in my cities for various purposes, such as developing local economy, making the city well-known, etc. Our city Linhai created the Festival of the Great Wall in the South. It has been celebrated for three years. However, some Linhainese think holding such a festival causes some problems to the city. What effects does the Festival of the Great Wall in the South bring to us? Make a list
Good Effects Bad Effects
。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。
Step 5. Homework
1. Oral Work: Read and recite the new words learnt in this class.
Read and recite some beautiful and useful sentences in the text.
2. Written Work: Suppose you are the journalist of Huipu Sunshine Magazine. You are going to write a passage about Kwanzaa.
3. Finish Period 2 in Winners
Unit 15
Teaching Aims:
1.Learn and master the following words and expressions: have a good time,without luck,pay off
recognize,ball,continue,diamond,jewellery,necklace,palace,francs,after all,call on,bring out,try on,
2.Improve the students' reading comprehension through reading activities.
Teaching Important Points:
1.Learn the language in the play,especially in dialogues.
2.Learn the usages of some words and expressions.
3.Get the students to improve their reading comprehension.
Teaching Difficult Points:
1.How to use the tenses correctly in a dialogue.
2.How to tell the differences between“after all,in all and above all”.
Teaching Methods:
1.Question-and-answer method before reading to make students interested in what they will learn.
2.Fast-reading to get the general idea of the text.3.Individual,pair or group work to make every student work in class.
Teaching Procedures:
Step Ⅰ. Greetings:Greet the whole class as usual.
Step 2. Revision
T:Yesterday we practised making up some short plays.Now I'll ask some students to act out them before class.
SS:Teacher asks two or three groups to act.
Step 3. Lead-in
1.What kind of plays do you like best?
2. Have you ever acted in a play? What role did you play?
3.what should be included in a play?
Step 4. Pre-reading
T:Now let's watch the play together.Watch carefully and then I'll ask you some questions.
(Teacher plays the TV set for the students to watch.After that,teacher asks the students some questions.)
T:When and where did the story happen?
S3:It happened in a park in Paris,one afternoon in 1870.
T:Who can tell me something about the play?
S4:It's a play about a necklace.And it tells us a story about Mathilde Loisel,who borrowed a diamond necklace from her friend Jeanne.They were good friends then.When they met in a park ten years later,Jeanne didn't recognize Mathilde at first and then Mathilde told Jeanne what had happened to her.
T:Yes,you are right.
Step 5 Listen to the tape and answer the following questions:
1.What is the relationship between these three characters?
Mathilde, the young lady and Pierre, the young man are couple Jeanne is Mathilde’s friend.
2.What is the mood of Mathilde in scene one ? Why? Mathilde sound tired and upset.
3.How does she feel in scene two?
She is on one hand very excited for the ball , on the other hand she is worried because she has no new dress and no jewelry for the ball.
Step 6 . Reading
When and where did the story happen?
A park in Paris , one afternoon 1870
Scene 1 :
Time: One afternoon, 1870
Place: A park in Paris
Who Methilde Jeanne
What Met each otherMethilde looked older.
Parts: Marthilde, Jeanne
General idea: Marthilde tells Jeanne about her ten years of hard life.
Choose the best answer
When Jeanne met Mathilde in the park, she said she didn't know Mathilde, because ______ . D
A.they hadn’t met for ten years B.Jeanne no longer liked Mathilde
C.Mathilde looked younger than before D.Mathilde had changed a lot
She had been working very hard for ten years , so she looked older than her age.
Answer the questions after watching scene 1
1.When did the story happen? ( 1870 )
2.Why Jeanne could not recognize Mathilde?
Mathilde changed a lot and became so old.
3.What made Jeanne think that Mathilde was ill?
She doesn’t look well.
4.Why Jeanne was so surprised when Mathilde mentioned the necklace?
It happened ten year ago and maybe she has forgotten
Scene 2:
When: Ten years before(1860)
Where: The home of Mathilde and Pierre Loisel
Who: Mathilde and Pierre Loisel
What Got an invitation to a ball and got ready for it.
General idea: Pierre and his wife were invited to the ball at the palace.They decided to borrow some jewellery from Jeanne.
Choose the best answer
1.Why was Mathilde worried when her husband told her the invitation? A
A. Because she hadn’t got an evening dress.
B.Because she didn’t want to attend the ball.
C.Because she have no time to the ball.
2. It can be learned from scene 2 that to be invited to the palace ball ____. C
A. meant working hard day and night in the future B. meant spending a lot of money
C. was a great honor D. was not wonderful news
3. Mathilde did not want to wear a flower to the ball because_____ . C
A. she didn't like flowers B. people were not allowed to wear a flower at the ball
C. it would look shabby（寒酸的） to wear a flower D. flowers would bring her bad luck
Answer the questions after watching Scene2.
1.Why did Pierre say it was wonderful news?
He was invited to the ball.
2.What kind of feeling did he have when Pierre was the only person in his office to be invited?
Maybe he was glad and pride.
3.Why didn’t Mathild want to wear a flower?
Because everyone would wear jewellery
4.What decision did they make finally? They borrowed jewellery from their friends
Scene 3:
When: Ten years later(1870)
Where: In the park
Who: Mathilde, Jeanne
What The story of the lost necklace.
General idea: Mathilde lost the necklace at the ball. So she and her husband worked ten years to pay for it. But ten years later, Jeanne told her the necklace was not a real diamond necklace.
Characters Description of each character
Mathilde vain, glad, sad, scared, old, responsible…
Pierre happy, careful, scared, responsible…
Jeanne surprised, kind, friendly…
Choose the best answer
1. How much money did they spend in returning Jeanne’s necklace? B
A. It cost her over four hundred francs. B.It cost her about thirty-six thousand francs.
C.It cost her about five hundred francs. D.It cost her about fifty-six thousand francs
What was the real price of Jeanne’s necklace? C
How much did Mathilde’s dress cost her ? A
2. Which sentence expresses the main idea of the story? A
A.Mathilde lost the borrowed necklace and had to work hard for ten years to pay it back.
B.Mathilde worked hard to buy a new jewel for her friend.
C.Mathilde lost her borrowed necklace.
D.Mathilde found she was cheated（欺骗）.
3.What do you think of Mathilde ? A
A.A vain （虚荣）woman B.A hard-working woman
C. A greedy（贪婪） woman D.A pretty and rich woman
4. What’s the author’s writing style? A
A.irony （讽刺） B.humour C.sorrow D.delight
5.The story is told _____. C
A.in inverse (反转） order B.in narration order（叙述）
C.in flashback order（倒叙） D.in time order
time order：Getting the invitation ----- Borrowing a necklace -----Losing the necklace ----- Buying a new necklace ----- Returning the necklace----- Learning the truth
Questions to scene 3
1.What happened on their way home after the ball ?
Mathilde found that the necklace was lost. They returned to the place to look for it but didn’t find it.
2.What did they do for Jeanne ?
They borrowed money to buy Jeanne a diamond necklace which looked exactly like the lost one.
3. What did they do in order to pay off the debt ?
They both worked day and night for 10 years
STEP 7 True or False
1.Mathilde borrowed an evening dress and a diamond necklace from her friend for the palace ball.
2. Mathilde was the only woman who was invited to the palace hall.
3. Pierre promised to buy Mathilde a nice evening dress which cost about 400 francs T
4. That evening at the ball was the happiest in their lives because they had a lot of fun and Mathilde was the centre of people’s attention. T
5. They rushed back, looked everywhere for the lost necklace and they found it.
6. They had to apologize to Mathilde’s friend Jeanne for that and promised to work for her to make up for the loss.
7. They bought a diamond necklace which cost only 500 francs and returned it to Jeanne .
8. They bought a real diamond necklace and returned it to Jeanne . Then they had to work night and day for 10 long years to pay off the debt . T
9. Jeanne didn’t recognize Mathilde at first because she changed a lot in the past ten years. T
10. Mathilde looked older than her age because she was ill.
11 They lost the necklace on the way to the ball in the palace.
12. Mathilde attended the ball wearing a flower.
13. Finally they paid off all their debts. T
Step 8 Summary of each scene
Scene1
Mathilde meets her friend, Jeanne in a park and begins to explain to Jeanne why she looks older than her age.
Scene2
Mathilde recalls the events ten years before that changed her life.
Scene3
Jeanne remembers what happened. Mathilde reveals that she lost Jeanne’s necklace and replaced with another one. Jeanne tells Mathilde that the necklace she borrowed was a fake one.
Step 9 Structure:
Borrow a necklace: Why an invitation to a ball
When Ten years ago
Whom Her friend Jeanne
Lose the necklace when At/after the ball
Where Palace/ way
Return the necklace How Buy a new one
How much 36,ooo francs
How long Ten years of hard work
Learn the truth Not a diamond but a glass one
Step 10 . Post-reading
T:Now listen to the tape again.This time you should pay attention to your pronunciation and intonation.
(Teacher plays the tape.After that,teacher gives students a few minutes to read the text aloud.At last students do an exercise for consolidation.)
T:Now suppose Mathilde returned to the palace where the ball was held to ask about the necklace.She answered some questions asked by the workers in the palace please read these sentences and match them.
(After a while,teacher checks the answers with them.)
Suggested answers:1.E 2.C 3.B 4.F 5.A 6.D
Step 11 Discussion
If you are Mathilde, and you find the necklace is gone after the ball, what will you do?
Unit 16
一、明确教学目标
1. Develop the students reading ability, especially their reading comprehension.
2. Read the reading passage and know about
3. Enable the students to know the serious attitude to science.
二、教学过程
Step 1 Presentation（整体感知）
Do you know the names of some famous scientist? What are they famous for?
Einstein Darwin Newton Edison Marie Curie Franklin
Relative theory Evolution Gravity Electric Bulb Radioactivity Kite experiment
Today we come to the Reading. It s about As we all know ,Benjamin Franklin is a famous politician．But today, we will read a passage about him as a scientist. His serious attitude to science .Let’s see how Franklin made his famous electricity experiment by flying a kite．
Step 2 Pre-reading discussions
We all know that it is the scientists’ great effort that makes the great achievement on science. Could you name some scientists’names? And what are they famous for? Try to fill in the blanks of the following form, if you。Can’t, ask your classmate to help you．Form: in the 18th & 19th centuries scientists all over the world made many important discoveries．Give some example．／Physics／Medicine／Chemistry／Biology
Some famous scientists are:
Archimedes: mathematics and physics: he discovered pi (π)
Darwin: biology: he discovered that the ancestors of people were monkeys
Curie: physics: she discovered radium and radioactivity
Newton: physics: he discovered why all things fall down to earth.
Physics Medicine Chemistry Biology
√ Madame Curie √ Florence Nightingale √Watson & Crick √Beatrix Potter
(Radioactivity) (Pie charts) (DNA) (“seeds” of mushrooms)
√ Isaac Newton √ John Snow √Gay-Lussac √Charles Darwin
(gravity) (spread of disease) (Gas laws) (Evolution)
√ Lord Kelvin √ Louis Pasteur √ Mendeleev √ Carl Linnaeus
(lowest temperature) (germs) (Periodic Table of elements) (Naming plants)
Step 3 Reading Fast reading
Listen to the tape and answer the following question.
1. Was the experiment done in June 1752 successful?
Yes, the experiment was successful
2. What did this experiment prove?
This experiment proved that light- ing and electricity were the same.
Read the text carefully again, and give the students some explanations.
Get the students read the test and then decide if the following statements are true (T) or false (F).
1．In 1752 scientists already knew what electricity is. T
2．Franklin was helped by a friend to do the experiment.
3．Franklin made the kite of silk because wet silk does not conduct electricity.
4．A condenser was used in the experiment to store electricity. T
5．The key tied to the string was put into the door to stop he kite from flying away.
6.Franklin conducted the kite experiment in sunny days.
Read he passage and then find out the main idea．
Paragraph 1 Introduction of Franklin’s experiment．
Paragraph 2-3 The process Of the experiment．
Paragraph 4-6 The tip of doing the experiment．
Aim: To show that lightning and electricity are the same.
Materials: Some wooden sticks, a piece of silk, some rope, a very sharp piece of metal, a silk ribbon, a key, a condenser, a small shed, a thunderstorm with lightning.
Instructions: Paragraphs 5 and 6. Description: Paragraph 3.
Results: The electricity stored in the condenser can be used to do other Experiments, which proves that lightning and electricity are the same.
Discussion: None.
Step 4 Listening to the reading passage
Play the tape for the students to listen and follow. Pay attention to the pro- nunciation and intonation.
Step 5 Post-reading
Answers to Exercise 1:1 True 2 False 3 False 4 True 5 False
Suggested answers to Exercise 2:
1 He wanted to prove that lightning and electricity are the same thing.
2 A silk kite will last longer in bad weather than a paper kite.
3 Yes. Franklin's experiment was very dangerous be cause if something went wrong he could be killed by the lightning.
Answers to Exercise 3:1 Incorrect 2 Correct 3 Incorrect 4 Correct
Extension 1 Franklin said, “You can collect and store the electricity with the condenser and use it for other experiments.” Ask students what other kinds of simple experiments could be done using the electricity stored in the condenser. Benjamin Franklin conducted many experiments in his life. You might want your Ss to go on the Internet to find out what they were and report back to the class. '
Step 6 Summary
the purpose of the experiment To show the lighting and electricity are the same:
Time:: June 1752 People: Franklin, his son Place: a shed in the fields
Weather: Thunderstorm, rainy day
Four things needed for the experiment: a strong kite, a key, bad weather, a condenser
Three important steps to prepare for the experiment: fix, fasten, tie
Step 7 Homework：
1．Introduce a scientist hay you admire most。
2．Finish Winners Period 2
Unit 17
一、明确目标
1. Develop the students reading ability, especially their reading comprehension.
2. Read the reading passage and know about the great woman Helen Thayer.
二、教学过程
Step 1 Presentation
Today we come to the Reading. It is freezing cold in the North Pole and the South Pole.
T：Look at the picture and think it over：Could the polar bear meet the penguin in life？
S：Never， because the polar bear lives on the North Pole， while the the penguin lives on the South Pole. So it’s impossible for them to meet each other in life, except in zoos.
T:Few people, in the world have ever been there. However, there was a brave woman who had traveled alone to the North Pole and the South Pole. Do you know who she was? Right, Helen Thayer. She was the first woman who traveled alone there. Today we are going to read about the great woman the great woman, Helen Thayer.
Step 2 Pre-reading discussions
Suggested answers:
Question 1: A warm coat, gloves, a cap, wool pants, long underwear, boots, dark sunglasses, rope, a backpack, skis or snowshoes, a tent, sled, a radio transmitter, a cellphone, dried food, compass, maps, a sleeping, bag, a small stove, matches, cooking fuel, an ice pick, flags, etc. All of these items are needed to keep warn, to provide shelter and food, to give directions, and to explore safely on snow and ice. What does not need to be brought? (Drinking water)
Question 2: Countries that are part of the North Pole: Norway, Sweden, Russia, Finland, US, Canada, Greenland (which is part of Denmark).
Countries that are part of the South Pole: Chile, Argentina, South Africa, Australia, New Zealand
Question 3: Some animals that live on the North Pole: polar bear, wolf, snow fox, seal, walrus, reindeer, moose, killer whales
Some animals that live on the South Pole: penguin, seal, walrus, whales,
Imagine you are traveling alone to the South Pole. What will you take with you? Why?
Step 3 Reading
Read the text carefully again, and give the students some explanations. First show the students some pictures of Antarctica in order to arouse the student’s interest there.
Then ask some questions about the lonely continent.
Fast reading
Read the title, the first paragraph and the last one quickly to get the main idea of the whole passage :
Helen Thayer’s travel alone to Antarctica
Her _expedition_to the South Pole
Scanning: Find out how many parts the text can be divided into.
Part1(Para.1) A journey of challenge and danger to Antarctica began
Part2(Para.2-7) What happened on her way to Antarctica
Part3(Para.8) Making a decision
Careful-reading :
Task1: True or False
1. She traveled to Antarctica with her dog team to pull her sled. (F)
2. During the first week, the weather was always fine. (F)
3. Although the winds were getting stronger and stronger, her tent was not blown away. (T)
4. Thanks to all the training she had had before, she was able to get out of danger. (T)
Task2: Questions for Details:
1.What did she do at 50?
2. How did Helen plan to celebrate her 60th birthday?
3.What was the weather like?
4.Why did Helen want to make Nov. 12th special? How did she celebrate the day?
5.What happened when she was moving forward over slope ?
6.How did she rescue herself?
7.How did she hurt herself ?
8.What’s the result of the accident ?
9.What was her decision ?
10.Do you think Thayer’s trip was a failure ?Why?
Part1 A journey of challenge and danger to Antarctica began
1.What did she do at 50? To travel alone to the North Pole.
2. How did Helen plan to celebrate her 60th birthday?
She went to the South Pole, Antarctica to celebrate her 60th birthday.
Part2 On her way to Antarctica
3.What was the weather like?
Time Weather
The first days good weather;icy but not strong wind;bright sunshine
The third day stormy weather;stronger wind
4. Why did Helen want to make Nov. 12th special? How did she celebrate the day?
Because it was her birthday. She thawed a frozen cake over her fire, placed a candle on the top, lit it and sang “happy birthday to me” at the top of her voice.
5. What happened when she was moving forward over a slope ?
She had fallen into a hole and was hanging on the ropes tied to the sled
6. How did she rescue herself?
She used the way of self-rescue practiced many times in the mountains.
7. How did she hurt herself ?…have a bad accident with … and hurt …
8. What’s the result of the accident?…couldn’t stand on …, be woozy …
Part3 Making a decision
9. What was her decision ? She decided to give up .
10.Do you think Thayer’s trip was a failure?Why?
I don’t think it is a failure . She had met the challenges of solo travel in an extreme climate.
Step 3 Revision
On Nov 1st, , I began my s___ travel to A_____ in order to c_____ my 60th birthday. The first days the weather was very good and there was b_____ sunshine.But changes were ___ __ ____.Soon,the day was cold and s____. I traveled slowly because of the bad weather. On Nov 12th, I celebrated my birthday __ a special way.During my e_____, I came a____ some accidents: I once dropped out ___ ___ my skis and ___ ___ a hole; I couldn't s___ __my left leg and my head was woozy ___ hitting the ground and so on. However, I o______ those difficulties thanks __ my training I had had. I ___ ___ the expedition at last w____ regret. It is an experience I shall never forget and shall v___ for the r___ of my life.
Keys: sole; Antarctic; celebrate;bright;around the corner;stormy;in;expedition;across;from;under;fall into;from;overcame;to; gave up;Without;value;rest
Step 4 Discussion
What kind of woman is Helen Thayer ? Describe her in a few sentences.
What can you learn from her?
Step 5 Rle Play:
Imagine Helen were invited to Wenzhou TV Station. One student acts as Helen and the other a reporter . Make up an interview between them.
Step 6 Summary 小结
Step 7 Homework :
1. Write down your own interview.
Retell the passage with the help of the following pictures.
“Winner” Period 1 in Unit 17.
Unit 18
一、明确目标
1. Develop the students reading ability, especially their reading comprehension.
2. Read the reading passage and know about New Zealand.
二、教学过程
Step 1 Lead in
How many continents and oceans are there in the world?Asia ,Europe , America, Africa, Oceania Pacific, Indian, Atlantic, Arctic
Today we come to the Reading. It’s about New Zealand. Today we are going to read about New Zealand, as we know, New Zealand is an island. Do you know where it is? Now, well look at the map and New Zealand and the seas surrounding it, (the Pacific and Tasman Sea)
Step 2 Pre-reading discussions
Get the students to look at the map of the world and write down the names of five islands and describe where they are. Then ask the students to compare the notes with the partners. At the end collect the answers from some of the students.
Answers to Exercise 1:
Name of the island Location
Taiwan Taiwan Island lies off the east of the mainland of China.
Hainan Hainan Island lies off the southern coast of the mainland of China, in the“ South China Sea.
The Philippines The Philippines lie(s) in the South China Sea, southeast of Hong Kong.
Hawaii ”Hawaii lies in the middle of the Pacific Ocean.
New Zealand New Zealand lies off the east coast of the mainland of Australia.
Great Britain Great Britain lies off the northwest coast of Europe. The nearest countries are France and Ireland, which is also an island.
Answers to Exercise 2:
The capital of Taiwan is Tapei, which lies in the north of the island.
The capital of Hainan is Haikou City, located in northern part of the island.
The capital of the Philippines is Manila, which lies in the south on the second largest, northern island. Honolulu, in the northwest, is the capital of Hawaii. Wellington, on the southwest coast of the North Island, is the capital of New Zealand.
London, the capital city of Great Britain, lies in the southeast.
Answers to Exercise 3:
For all destinations, students may answer that they can be reached by air from the nearest city with an airport. However, the exercise will be more interesting if students describe in detail how they would travel, which cities they would pass through and the exact locations of these cities. Instead of air travel, encourage students to describe journeys over land and sea voyages.
Step 3 Skimming
Read the text carefully again, and give the students some explanations. Ask the students to read the text silently and fast to get general idea of each paragraph
Paragraph 1 location or geography
location: lie off the eastern coast of Australia
Size The same as Japan
Capital: Wellington (on the North Island)
Cities: Auckland (north) ; Christchurch (south) ; Queenstown (further to the south)
Paragraph 2; climate
Temperature: Mild sea climate; subtropical
Rainfall: Rain a lot
Season: Summer ( Dec.-Feb.) Winter (June-Aug.)
Paragraph 3: natural resource
Seas: Deep blue
Cities Lie on a bay & a natural deep harbor
Beaches Clean
Mountains Dead volcanoes
Hot springs Throw hot water high into the air
National bird Kiwi (can not fly)
Paragraph 4 history
1000 years ago The Maori (earliest
1421 Chinese sailors
1642 Dutchman Abel Tasman named the islands
1769 Captain James Cook took possession of the islands
1840 Europeans (British) signed an agreement; National holiday (6th Feb.)
Paragraph About Title
Paragraph 1 Location Geography
Paragraph 2 Climate Climate
Paragraph 3 Landscape Nature
Paragraph 4 History History
How to describe a country or a region
First paragraph the population, ethnic groups and the languages
Second paragraph the culture of one or more ethnic groups that are native
Third paragraph the agricultural products that the place is famous for.
Fourth paragraph things people like to do in their free time in that place.
True or False
1.The other name for New Zealand is Aotearoa. T
2.North island is colder than South Island.
3.The south island is famous for hot springs.
4.New Zealand is a French-speaking country.
5.Besides the kiwi, there are other types of birds that only live in New Zealand.
6.No Chinese people live in New Zealand.
Step 4 Scanning
Answer the following questions.
1. How many islands is New Zealand made up of and what are they?
It is made of two large islands. They are North Island and South Island.
2.what and where is the capital of New Zealand?
The capital is Wellington and lies on the North Island.
3.What do you know about the weather in New Zealand?
New Zealand has a mild sea climate, while the north is subtropical. It rains quite a lot. The warnest months are December to February. The coldest months are June to August.
4. What kind of animal do you think only lives in New Zealand? Kiwi
5. Who were the earliest people to come to New Zealand and how did they get there?
The Maori were the earliest people to come to New Zealand.
They traveled In narrow boats and brought dogs, rats and plants with them.
6.What is the official language in New Zealand? English and Maori.
7. For the Maori, what are special days called? Huis.
8. When are the school main holidays? Mid-December till early February
9. What do you know about weather in New Zealand ?
A mild sea, subtropical in the north
Step 5 Choose the right answer.
1. From the passage we can figure out Maori people are about _____ more than Asians living in New Zealand. B
A. 532,000 B. 304,000 C. 340,000 D. 228,000
2. In New Zealand, a public servant may offer services ______ . D
A. in many languages B. only in English
C. only in Maori D. either in English or in Maori
3. Maori people believe that _____ C
A. not all the people have spirits. B. one’s spirit will never leave his body.
C. one’s spirit will not die when he dies. D. one’s spirit will disappear the moment he is dead.
4)The cities whose rainfall changes least from winter to summer are___ . D
A. Queenstown & Wellington B. Auckland & Christchurch
C. Auckland & Wellington D. Christchurch & Queenstown
Step 6 Summary
New Zealand:
location: lie off the eastern coast of Australia
climate: have a mild sea climate and subtropical
natural beauty: have natural deep harbors clean sand beach beautiful landscape hot spring、special plants and animals
history: 1,000 years ago the Maori
around 1421 Chinese sailors
in 1642 the Dutchman
in 1769 Captain Cook
by 1840 Europeans, the Maori
Politics: women’s voting pension
Agriculture: cattle sheep deer goat
Sports & free time: sailing swimming horse-riding rock-climbing
Wildlife: flightless birds (kiwi)
Step 7 Find out what the words in bold refer to:
It New Zealand
Which hot springs
this heat the heat near the earth’s surface
these settlers Europeans / British settlers
it England
Step8 Post-reading
Answers to the exercises:
1 I It refers to New Zealand.
2 which refers to hot springs.
3 this heat refers-to the heat near the earth's surface.
4 these settlers refers to European I British settlers.
5 it refers to England.
2 I History I Fourth paragraph
2 Climate I Second paragraph
3 Natural beauty I Third paragraph
4 Geography I First paragraph
3 A New Zealand lies in the Pacific Ocean.
B The Tasman Sea lies to the west of New Zealand.
C Wellington, the capital of New Zealand, lies in the southeast of the North Island.
D Auckland lies on the northeastern coast of New Zealand.
E Christchurch lies to the east, on the South Island of New Zealand.
4 I B 2 B 3 D 4 D
5 New Zealand has mild summers with lighter rain and cold winters with heavier rain. Nights in both seasons are cooler than days but not so much cooler. The graphs don't give any information about the climate and weather in autumn and spring. The graphs also don't give any information about the number of hours that the sun shines.
6 The climate on the North Island in New Zealand is like the warm climate in Southern China although the rainfall is less. The climate of the South Island can still be called mild, and is like the climate in southwestern China although it does not get as much rainfall. Perhaps on the whole, China is a bit warmer in summer and a bit colder in winter.
（四）总结扩展
Step 9 Summary 小结
Step 10 Homework：
1、Finish half part of Period 2 in Winners of Unit 18
Unit 19
一、明确教学目标
1. Develop the students reading ability, especially their reading comprehension.
2. Read the reading passage and know about the differences between traditional agriculture and modern one in China meanwhile any necessary common knowledge about the importance of keeping the balance of nature.
3. To encourage the students to learn more for the future green agriculture of our country and the importance of protecting of environment.
二、教学过程
Step 1 Presentation
1.Who is the man in the picture? He’s Jia Sixie.
2.What do you know about him?
Jia Sixie, author of China’s first agricultural encyclopedia (百科全书), was one of the leading agronomists in Chinese history. In the late years of the Northern Wei Dynasty (386-534), he wrote Qimin Yaoshu (Essential Skills for the Common People). It is the earliest and most complete agricultural encyclopedia still in existence in China.
Today we come to the Reading. It’s about the differences between traditional agriculture and modern one in China meanwhile any necessary common knowledge about the importance of keeping the balance of nature. Let’s look at the pictures and reconstruct the text by comparing traditional and modern farming.
Step 2 Pre-reading discussions
Answers to Exercise 1:
The first picture shows a farmer sitting in the courtyard, in front of the house. There is a basket in front of her and two chickens that eat from the basket. On this farm, chickens can walk freely in the yard.The picture below shows a large building in which thousands of chickens sit in small cages. On this farm, chickens sit in cages inside a building.
The second picture shows a pile of animal shit (manure). The picture below shows a bag of chemical fertiliser.
The third picture show a farmer working on the land with two animals. The animals pull the plough to work the land.
The picture below shows a tractor. In this picture, the farmers use the tractor to work the land.
The fourth picture shows dry, barren land. The earth is so dry that nothing can grow there.
The picture below shows a greenhouse, where plants grow in a building .made of glass.
Answers to Exercise 2:
Ask the students to discuss the advantages and disadvantages of modern farming; they can also think of the advantages and disadvantages of the old ways of farming.
Raising chickens
Small scale Large scale
The farmer can keep only a few chickens. The farmer can keep thousands of chickens.
It does not cost a lot to keep the chickens. It costs a lot of money to keep the chickens.
It is not a lot of work to keep the chickens. It's a lot of work to keep the chickens: feeding, cleaning etc.
The chickens don't have many problems. If chickens get ill, many die or must be killed.
The chickens are not so fat. The chickens are big and fat.
The eggs and meat taste very good. The meat and eggs do not taste so good.
The chickens are free. The chickens are not free.
The farmer can sell the chicken dung
Fertilisers
Natural fertiliser (manure; also dung) Chemical fertiliser
It's free or can be bought at low prices.
It is a lot of work to mix it with the soil.
It has a bad smell.
It takes a lot of place to store.
It is difficult to transport. It's expensive.
It is not a lot of work to mix it with the soil. It has no smell.
It takes little place to store.
It is easy to transport.
Animals (buffalo; also ox) Machines (Tractor) Horsepower
They are not so expensive. They are expensive.
The “fuel” is cheap (grass, hay etc). The fuel is expensive (gasoline).
They don't pollute the air. They pollute the air.
They can be used on different terrain; eg hill slopes or wet ground. They can only be used on flat (level) and dry terrain.
They need to rest sometimes. They don't need to rest.
You can use them for about 10-20 years. You can use them for 5-20 or more years if you can get enough spare (repair) parts.
If they get young ones, you get more for free.
If they totally “break down”, you can eat them.
Climate control
Open air Greenhouse
If the weather conditions are bad you can loose the crops.
The landscape is more beautiful.
The land must be good for farming (arable land).
Weather conditions are controlled, so they cannot damage crops.
It is expensive to build and operate (gas, water, electricity) a greenhouse.
If there is a power failure, you may lose crops.
The landscape is ugly:
Greenhouses can be built where the land is not suitable for farming.
1950s - 1980s 1980s - present
The use of machines eg tractors The use of greenhouses
The use of electric pumps for irrigation To make vegetables bigger or better
The use of chemical fertilisers To change vegetables so they can grow on poor
The use of insect killers soil
The use of special seedbeds Knowledge from abroad
IT technique and technical are words that mean something with
technology FORM machines, then technology must be the noun to match these two
words meaning new machines or doing things that are based on
modem knowledge.
agricultural FORM IT cultural is the adjective for culture, then agricultural must be
the adjective for agriculture, meaning to do with agriculture.,
Step 3 Scanning:
Q1:What is the biggest problem to Chinese farmers?
China is a country with the largest population in the world,but only seven percent of the land can be used for farming.
Q2:What does GM mean?
“G” stands for “genetically” from the world “genes”.M” stands for “modified”,which means “changed”.
Step 4 Skimming
Read the whole text .Find out the topic sentence in each paragraph.
Para.1: For thousands of years traditional agriculture in China did not change very much.
Para.2: Over time, many farming techniques have been modernised.
Para.3: Not only is food production important but also taking care of the environment.
Para.4: Using the latest technologies, Chinese scientists grow vegetables in greenhouses.
Para.5: Another technique tries to create plants that produce more and bigger fruit.
Para.6: The tomoto is one of nearly 4,500 different plants thet are genetically modified.
1.What helps Chinese farmers produce enough food for the largest population in the world?
High technology.
2.When was more advanced technical information brought in from abroad? In the 1980s
3.What does “which ” refer to in the last two lines ? “Which” refers to “golden rice”
4. What is the other name of “golden rice ” in the text ? GM rice
5.How much does arable land take up in China? Only 7 percent.
6.How many ways are mentioned to make the land produce more? What are they?
4. Fertilisation; irrigation; 2 or more crops are planted each year where possible; more advanced technical information.
7.What does new techniques mean?
Those that are used to increase agricultural production without harming the environment.
8.When did scientist start to develop new techniques? From the early 1990s.
5.How many unusual ways are mentioned to deal with the shortage of arable land?
2. Grow vegetables in greenhouses; GM.
Step 5 Scanning
1: What’s the biggest problem to Chinese farmers?
The shortage of arable land.
2: What does GM mean?
“G” stands for “genetically” “M” stands for “modified” (changed)
3.What is important for future agriculture ?
Both food production and taking care of the environment are more important .
4.What should future agriculture depend on?
Future agriculture should depend on high technology as well as traditional methods
Read the text carefully again
What advice does Jia Sixie give farmers?
1. Farmers should do things at the right time of the year.
2. Farmers should examine the soil carefully.
3. If the conditions of the soil is not good, farmers should improve it.
4. Before sowing or planting crops, farmers should clean rough ground and remove weed.
5. Farmers should let sheep or cattle (cows) walk on the land before sowing or planting crops.
6. Farmers should plough the land, so weeds are destroyed.
7. When ploughing the land, farmers should plough deep the first time and less deep the second time.
8. Farmers will get the best results if they change crops in their fields.
9. If farmers plant rice in a field one year, and wheat in that field the following year, they will harvest good crops
10. If farmers plant wheat close together, they will have better results than when they plant wheat leaving space between the plants.
11. It is good to grow different plants next to each other in the same field.
Step 4 Listening to the reading passage
Play the tape for the students to listen and follow. Pay attention to the pro- nunciation and intonation.
Step 5 Post-reading
Choose the best answers.
1 In China only seven percent of the land is used for farming. This is _______. D
A because farmers don’t need more land to produce food for the whole population
B because China needs more & more land to build cities
C because there are not enough farmers to work on the land
D because the other land can’t be used for agriculture
2 Fertilisation is a technique that is used to ______. A
A make poor soil better B make wet land drier
C make dry land wetter D grow vegetables with their roots in water instead of earth
3 Modern agriculture means finding ways to ______________.C
A increase irrigation & stop using fertilisers
B stop irrigation & using fertilisers
C increase production & be friendly to the environment
D produce the same amount while taking better care of nature
4 In the sentence “ … they are protected from the wind, rain & insects”, “they” means _______. C
A greenhouses B roots C vegetables D tomatoes
5 In GM “M” stands for “modified”, which means “changed”. What changes is _____________. C
A the way in which poor soil is made better
B the way in which Chinese farmers work on their land
C the way in which crops develop from seed
D the way in which farmers take care of the environment
6.What should future agriculture depend on according to the text ? D
A. High technology B. Traditional methods
C. High technology or traditional methods
D. Not only traditional methods but also high technology
7.How do farmers in China make their land produce more? D
A. They have long used techniques such as fertilization and irrigation
B. More advanced technical information was brought in from abroad
C. Technology and machines are imported
D. All above
8. Which of the following statements is not true ? C
A. It saves time for the farmers to plant two or more crops every year where possible
B. Scientists began to develop new techniques to increase agricultural production without harming the environment
C. Food production is more important than taking care of the environment
D. Only 7% of the land can be used for farming in China
9. The biggest problem of Chinese farmers is ____. A
A. the shortage of arable land B. lack of labor force
C. lack of technology D. lack of money
10. Scientists have started to develop new technology to increase agricultural production without harming the environment since _____. C
A. the 19th century B. modern times
C. the early 1990s D. the 1980s
11. New techniques are those which can ____. D
A. increase agricultural production B. protect the environment from being harmed
C. bring in great profit
D. not only increase agriculture production but also be friendly to the environment
12.The text is about ____. B
A. farmers in China
B. the development of agriculture in China
C. advanced technology in China
D. genetically modified plants in China
13. Which of the following is most probable in future agriculture according to the text ? D
A. Only high technology is used
B. It will greatly harm the environment
C. It will depend on only traditional methods
D. It will depend on both high technology and traditional methods
Answers to Exercise 2: Sample:
Answers to Exercise 2: Sample:
Kind How would you change it? Why do you want to change it in this way?
Fruit Watermelon Grow them like blocks instead of balls Easier to store, takes less space
Vegetable Onion Make sure they don't hurt your eyes anymore EasIer to peel, and cut
Animal Sheep To have red wool Looks funny and then we don't need to dye wool to make clothes
Step 6 Summary 小结
Step 7 Homework:Write a short passage about how we should protect our environment and build a green world.
Finish Post-reading in SB
Unit 20
一、明确教学目标
1. Develop the students reading ability, especially their reading comprehension.
2. Read the reading passage and know about Laughing Matter.
3. Learn to interview a person.
二、教学过程
Step 1 Leading in
Who can say something about comedians? Comedians are people, especially professional entertainers, who tell jokes or do amusing things to make people laugh and think. Look at the pictures . Do you know who these comedians are? What make them funny to you?
Step 2 Pre-reading discussions
Pre-reading
1. Who is the main character in the film? Charlie Chaplin
2. Do you know any comedians both at home and abroad? Please name some. Charlie Chaplin
The comic duo of the 1930s “Laurel and Hardy”. The thin one is called Stan Laurel, the stout one Oliver Hardy. They are funny because they are each other’s opposites: one fat and one thin; one is clever and one is silly etc.
Get the students to read and practice the dialogue in the text.
Work in pairs. Ask one student play the part of a journalist the other a circus down. Make up a dialogue referring to the questions and pictures.
Practice the useful expressions in pairs first, and then act out at class using dialogues or making sentences.
Sample answers for Question 1
Photo 1: The comic duo of the 1930s “Laurel and Hardy.” (The thin one is called Stan Laurel, while the stout one is called Oliver Hardy.) They are funny because they are each other's opposites: one fat and one thin; one is clever and one is silly etc.
Photo 2: Mr Bean. Although Mr Rowan Atkinson acts as different comic characters he is most famous around the world as Mr Bean. Mr Bean is funny because he makes funny faces, he acts silly, he seems to be quite stupid, and the things he does are strange.
Photo 3: Dustin Hoffman in the film Tootsie (1982). In this film Hoffman acts the role of a woman, and many . people agree that his performance was so good that you often can't tell the difference. But in the film of course there all kinds of funny moments.
Photo 4: Ma Ji is a well-known artist of crosstalk shows in China. His numerous crosstalk shows always make his audience roar with laughter. Ask the students to talk about Ma Ji themselves in pairs or groups.
Sample answers for Question 2:
Photo 1: Other comic duos are for example, Abbott and Costello, French and Saunders, Wallace.& Gromit or Beavis and Butthead.
Photo 2: Other comedians acting as clowns are for example, Charlie Chaplin, Buster Keaton or Austin Powers.
Photo 3: Other famous comedians who dressed up as women are for example, Dame Edna (Australia), Milton Berle (USA) and Eddy Izzard (UK).
Photo 4: Other famous crosstalk artists are Jiang Kun, Hou Yuewen, Feng Gong, Ma Sanli, Tang Jiezhong, etc.
Sample answers for Question 3:
1 I have seen some films of Laurel and Hardy and I think that they are very funny.
2 I find Mr Bean always very funny.or: I know some people think it is funny, but I think Mr Bean is very silly.
3 I don't think I ever saw this comedian. I am not sure if I would like it.
4 I once heard Hou Yuewen on the radio and I had to laugh so much that my stomach hurt and I had tears in my eyes.
Listening
Listen to the tape of the text and answer the question.
How many types of humor are introduced in the text?
Comedies clowns Laughing Matter crosstalk comedians
Laughing matter : 1.comedies 2. clowns 3.comedians 4-5.crosstalk
What is the text about?
1,The title is a bit of a puzzle to me and there are no other clues to find out what the text is about. I suppose it will be about something to laugh about.
2,If it’s about laughing or humour, it can be about jokes or funny storied.
Read the text again , try to divide the text into several parts and find out the main idea of each part:
Part 1: Comedies
Part 2: Clowns
Part 3: Comedians
Part 4: Crosstalk
PartⅠ Comedies
1. How do the writers of comedies often use to make people laugh?
Cross-dressing
Making fun of ….
Telling an amusing story
Acting out stereotypes
Speaking foreign language with an accent
Word play
2. Why is Dustin Hoffman so famous? C
A. He is famous for his works. B. He is famous for his foreign accent.
C. He is famous for his role acting as a woman. D. He is good at playing on words.
3. What techniques are used by the writers of comedies to make the audience laugh? _________. D
A. Stereotypes of nationalities or people doing certain jobs. B. Word play.
C. Cross-dressing way. D. Both A, B and C
4.“Funny plays often have characters that are stereotypes of nationalities or people doing certain jobs.” Which of the following has the same meaning with “character”? A
A. Mathilde Loisel is one of the characters in the play “The necklace”.
B. Chinese character is hard to learn for most of the foreigners.
C. His character is different from his wife’s.
D. The picture shows us the character of the desert landscape.
Part Ⅱ Clowns
1. In what ways do clowns make us laugh? What about comedians?
Clowns make people laugh by acting alone or as a pair
not using any words
using clothes, make-upand the way they walk
2. What is the writer’s opinion on clowns? _____ C
A. They would like to reach a wide audience.
B. They only have children in mind.
C. They are funny not only for children but also for adults.
D. They can help people forget their problems for a long time.
Part Ⅲ Comedians
Comedians make people laugh by body language and their face
acting out a sketch
playing with words.
Effect of comedians’ performance on people:
Make people not only laugh
but also think about life
True or False
1. Comedians are different from clowns because they don’t use body language or facial expressions in their shows. F
2. The show of a comedian is more profound (深刻的) than that of a clown T
3. The show of a comedian is more like that of a comedy. T
4. The situations comedians act out in their shows just look like comedies. F
Part Ⅳ Crosstalk
Crosstalk shows make people laugh by playing with words
making many jokes and funny conversations
dressing up a little or acting out small sketches
using rhythm and rhyming words.
using tongue twisters.
Step 3 Reading
Read the text carefully again, and give the students some explanations. Do a little quiz by speaking.、
1. ----John sends his best wishes. ----________.
A. That’s nice of him B. Oh, he is too police
C. It’s kind of him to say so D. You are really kind to me
2. ---- What do you think sally is like? ----She______
A. isn't in good health B. doesn’t’ like eating too much
C. likes to eat fish D. is very pretty
3. ---- Do you mind my taking this seat? ---- _______
A. Yes, sit down please B. No, of course not
C. Yes, take it please D. No, you can't take it
4. -----Leaving for Chicago? ------_______.
A. Soon B. Lately C. Late D. Sooner
5. -------Excuse me, have you got a light? ______. I don’t smoke.
A. Don’t mention B. Never mind C. I'm afraid not D. Thanks a lot
1. A 2.D 3.B 4.A 5.C
Step 4
Para. 1: Comedies:
- Ask students about famous Chinese and Western comedies.
- Ways of dressing or behaving.
- Stereotypes of people from different countries (including China)
- Funny accents (foreign, local or in certain jobs)
- Examples of word play.
Para. 2: Clowns: - Ask about different Chinese and Western clowns
- Ways of dressing, make-up
- Examples of jokes, fun
Para. 3: Comedians: - Ask about different Chinese and Western comedians.
- Mime, body language, facial expressions
- Retell famous sketches for comedy shows.
Para. 4: Crosstalk: - Ask about different crosstalk shows.
- In which way do crosstalk artists make people laugh?
Ask students to give some famous ex amples of rhyme, rhythm and tongue twisters from Chinese crosstalk shows (in Chinese).
Step 4 Listening to the reading passage
Play the tape for the students to listen and follow. Play the tape for the students to listen and follow. Pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation.
Step 5 Post-reading
1. How long has the tradition of crosstalk existed in China?
The tradition of crosstalk has existed in China for more than 2,000 years.
2. Give three examples of techniques that writers of comedies often use to make people laugh.
cross-dressing stereotypes word play
3.Why are some of Shakespeare’s comedies not so funny for us?
Some of Shakespeare’s plays are not so
篇13：高一英语下册Unit13-22教案集(人教版高一英语下册教案教学设计)
第二学期高一英语教学计划
1、总体目标：
1） 争取在20第二学期使学生的英语语言素质有一定程度的提高。期中考试和期末考试进入段前三名；期中考试我教的班级平均分高出全段平均分3。01分；平均及格率高出段平均及格率15。2%。
2） 争取在高一段学科竞赛中有较多的学生获奖，培养出一批尖子学生，带动学习有困难的学生。
2、具体的措施：
1） 加强备课的环节的细化；
2） 充分利用网络资源；
3） 强化交际， 加强互动；
4） 发挥“空中课堂“的优势，加强交际和答疑，培养学生的自主学习能力；
5） 每2、3单元测试一次；加强测试评价的调控，及时发现问题，解决问题；
6） 加强早读课的指导， 做到每周二、四、五三天早读下班辅导。
7） 保证当天作业两天内一定完成全批全改。
3、利用好期中考试和期末考试的调控作用，及时查漏补缺。
4、坚持做好每周日下午4；00-5：00 的“空中英语课堂“的课程辅导，促进学生的自主学习能力的发展。搞好课题成果的原始材料的积累，完成课题研究的论文（已经完成），参加温州市教师优秀科研论文评比。
5、认真完成高一英语研究性学习课程辅导，完成相关课题的指导和研究任务， 发表五篇相关的教学论文（《建构网络环境下的高中英语研究性学习模式》已经发表于《外语基础教育》20第1期）,《宾语从句六大考点》发表于《学生时代》年第1期。《利用Internet创新高中英语课堂教学的实践与思考》发表于《浙江现代教育技术》2006年第一期。《高考英语任务型阅读理解解析》发表于《学英语》高二听说读写拌第28期第3版，以及浙江《教育信息报》2006年6月4日高考专刊上。
6、保质保量地完成教育组的温州市基础教育科研课题；
7、完成电教科研论文的撰写（已经完成）参加2006年温州市电化教育科研论文评比活动。
本学期， 我已经获得温州使006年研究性学习教学案例评比一等奖； 温州市2006年高中英语教学案例评比三等奖； 温州市2006年课堂教学评价改革教学案例评比三等奖。
8． 在校园网上传精品课件46个； 上传精品教案15个，上传试卷30份； 在博客发表文章26篇。
Unit 13 Healthy eating单元教案
一、教学目标
Teaching Aims and Demands
1.Words and Phrases
Four Skills: stomach fever ought to examine plenty of diet keep up with make a right choice short of fit gain now and then.
2.train the students’ listening ability.
3.develp the students’ speaking ability by describing, talking and discussion.
Three Skills:
energy soft bar fuel chemical balance tasty boil mixture
Spoken English:
In the clinic / seeing a doctor:
What’s wrong with you? What’s the matter with you?
Lie down and let me examine you.
Let me have a look.
Where does it hurt?
Drink plenty of water and get some rest.
I’ve got a pain here. This place hurts.
There’s something wrong with back/my knee/my arm.
I don’t feel well.
Grammar:
Use of Language:
1. Master the function use of language as defined above.
2. Help the students to finish the tasks of listening, reading, writing, speaking presented in the book and the exercise book through using what the students have learned.
Learn the text about healthy eating. Get the students know about the basic knowledge of how to eat healthily.
Important points:
1. Talk about different kinds of food that one favorite.
2. Learn the basic knowledge of healthy eating.
3. Learn how to say in the clinic.
4. Grasp the language points and grammar in the text.
Difficult points: The use of modal verbs --- had better, should and ought to.
Teaching aids: computer or slider-projector
Way of Teaching: Communication way of teaching, discussion and group work.
高中英语绿色教案（1）
Unit 13 Healthy and Green eating
-. 教学目的和要求 ( Teaching aims and demands )
I: Topics 1. Talking about healthy food and junk food.
2. Talking about eating habits and health.
II: Functions
看病 ( Seeing a doctor )
Patient Doctor
I’ve got a pain here. Lie down and let me examine you.
This place hurts. Let me have a look.
I don’t feel well. Where does it hurt?
There’s something wrong with my back/ knee/arm. Drink plenty of water and get some rest.
You’d better have more green food and take enough exercise in the green fields.
提出建议和忠告 (Giving advice and making suggestions)
What can I do for you ? Can I help you? What’s the matter?
I advice you to ….? You’d better…. I think you should…
Why not …? I suggestion you should… Why don’t you …?
III: Vocabulary
1.Words: fat stomach fever salad peach ripe ought examine plenty soft bar fuel diet pace bean fibre mineral function chemical balance of nature fit unit digest gain sleepy brain peel tasty mushroom steam boil bacon lettuce mixture spoonful slice
2.Phrases:
junk food green food ought to plenty of keep up with make a choice
now and then roll up
IV: Grammar 情态动词(1)-had better, should, ought to
1. 就某事向某人提出建议或发表自己的观点-----使用 had better(not)
You had better get some rest. or You’d better get some rest.
2. 劝说某人做某事或不要做某事, 向某人提出忠告-----使用should(not) 或ought(not)to
You should /ought to be careful with fruit.
You should not /ought not to eat so much junk food. or You shouldn’t /oughtn’t to eat so much junk food.
二. 能力训练 (Ability training )
1. Through the learning of Warming Up, Listening and Speaking, let Ss skillfully master and use the expressions of seeing a doctor, talking about eating habits and health.
2. Through the learning of the passage, develop the Ss’ knowledge of green food.
3. Master the patterns of giving advice and making suggestions.
三. 德育渗透 (Moral training teaching)
Through the learning and talking, let the Ss know the importance of balance eating and healthy eating and develop the good eating habits of having green food.
四. 美育渗透 (Art training teaching )
Develop the Ss’ good sentiment of loving their life and health and have good living habits.
Period 1 New words and Warming Up
Teaching Aims
1. Learn the new words and expressions.
2. Learn the Warming Up to arouse the Ss’ love in talking.
Important Points in Teaching
1. The use of some words: fat vitamin snack fever ripe plenty of
2. Sentence pattern: I think…
3.The sense of green food
Difficult Points in Teaching
1. the use of the words
2. talking in English
Teaching Aids:1.a tape recorder2.a slide projector3.a computer for multimedia use
Teaching Methods Reading and speaking ；Pair/group work, individual work, class work
Teaching Procedures
Step 1 Learning
1. Learn the new words and expressions.
Ask some Ss to read the new words and expressions, then correct some mistakes if there are any.
2.Explain some uses of the words.
Step 2 Presentation
Every day we have food. Green food makes us feel full and happy and it also helps to build our bodies. But have you ever thought what you eat is junk food? Today we’re going to learn something about food, junk food and green food.
Step 3 Lead-in
Revise the names of different foods we eat.
Step 4 Warming Up
I. Talk about the pictures on Page 1 by asking and answering the following questions:
What food is it ?
What kind of food is it ? Is it green food or junk food? Why ?Which do you like better? Why ?
II: Ask your partner what they eat for breakfast, lunch, snack and supper and say if what they eat is junk food or green food ?
Step 5 Listening
Do the listening practice in Students’ book at Page 2.
Listening: Part One
1: What’s wrong with Mike?
A :He has a headache. B: He has a stomachache.
C :He has a toothache.
2: What did Mike have for breakfast?
A :Two pieces of chocolate. a glass of coke, and two cookies, which are not green food.
B : A couple of sandwiches.
C : Two hamburgers.
Part Two
Which side of Mike’s stomach hurts?
His left side hurts.
2. Does Mike have a fever?
No, he doesn’t. His temperature is normal.
3. What does the doctor tell Mike to do?
Take some pills and call him if there is a problem.
Step 6. Speaking
看病 ( Seeing a doctor )
Patient Doctor
I’ve got a pain here. Lie down and let me examine you.
This place hurts. Let me have a look.
I don’t feel well. Where does it hurt?
There’s something wrong with my back/ knee/arm. Drink plenty of water and get some rest.
You’d better have more green food and take enough exercise in the green fields.
Do the speaking Practice of Speaking in Students’ book at Page 2 in pairs.
Situation 1
Student A (Doctor)
Ask the patient what is wrong and give him some advice.
Student B (Patient)
I cough all the time. I have a fever and a headache.
Situation 2
Student A (Doctor)
Ask the patient what is wrong and give him some advice.
Student B (Patient)
I can’t sleep at night, so I am always very tired.
Student A (Patient)
My left arm is broken. It really hurts.
Student B (Doctor)
Ask the patient what is wrong and give him or her some advice.
Situation 3
Student A (Doctor)
Ask the patient what is wrong and give him some advice about green food .
Student B (Patient)
I can’t sleep at night, so I am always very tired.
Step7. Discussion about green food
1. If you are to host a party for your family, what kind of food would you like to buy? Would you like to buy any green food? And why?
2. Is it important to keep the balance of nature?
Step 8 Homework
1.Read and recite the new words and expressions.
2.Get ready for the next period.
3.Introduce some idea about green food.
3. Finish off Period 1 Unit 13 in “Winner”.
The design of the writing on the blackboard
Unit 13 healthy eating
The first period
green good j unk food
all the time,
have a fever,
be careful .
in the future,
advise sb. To do sth.
had better(nott) do
教学反思：
1、教学有法， 但无定法， 教要得法。这节课，我始终在教学中渗透绿色教育思想教育，作了这方面的尝试，使学生增长了关于绿色食品的知识， 使学生明白了保护环境， 促进国家可持续性发展的重要性。 我没有故意做秀， 很好地实现了自然渗透的原则，比较好地进行了绿色教育德育渗透的效果。
2、语言是交际的工具， 我始终坚持听说课的交际性原则， 让课堂的Warming-up部分成分热身， 让学生的语言思维动起来；交流和讨论非常充分。
3、这节的语言重点：建议的表达法和情态动词的用法在实际的语境中让学生深刻领悟到学以致用产生的效益。
4、绿色和交际是这节课的主旋律， 我一直让学生交流着， 让绿色贯穿了教学的整个过程， 包括教学课件和回家作业等。
PERIOD 2
Teaching Aids：Individual,pair or group work to make every student work in class.
1.Aims of knowledge:
Learn and master the phrases
2.Ability aims:
1．Train the student’s reading ability.
2．Develop the students’ speaking ability by describing, talking and discussion.
1. Moral aims:
Enable the students to understand the best way to make sure that we will fell and look fine is to develop healthy eating habits by learning the reading text.
Teaching important points:
1. Improve the student’s reading ability.
2. Master the following phrase: keep up with, too much, make choices, be harmful to, lose weight, be prepared for.
Teaching difficult points:
How to make the students understand the reading material better and answer some questions on the passage.
Teaching Aids:1.a tape recorder2.a slide projecto3.a computer for multimedia use
Teaching steps:
Step 1 Introduction
Yesterday we learned something about food. And we’ve3 known what food we eat is healthy food and what food is junk food. Who can give us an example? You try, please.
Using the questions on P3 to introduce the new text.
Step 2 Fast-reading
1.What does the “fuel ” mean in the first paragraph?
(It means different kinds of materials, such as protein, Calcium that we need to keep healthy.)2.What do we have to consider when we choose to buy or eat?
(What kinds of nutrients that the foods contain.)3.What made our eating habit changing?
(Many things: what people believe, advice from companies and stores.)
4. How can we feel and look fine?
(We ought to learn about our body and the fuel it needs to keep fit.)
Explain the language points if necessary.
Step 3.Skimming
Paragraph 1 (T or F)
1.Choosing what to eat is not as easy as it once was any longer.
2.Our eating habits have changed while our way of life has not changed.
3.21-century people prefer traditional food very much.
4,we had better learn to make right choices about food to keep up with the high pace of modern life.
Para2.
Nutrients Function Sources
protein
calcium
Carbohydrates
Vitamins
fiber ,minerals
Carefully-reading
--How many parts can be divided into
--Three parts.
--What’s the main idea of each part?
1.our eating habits are changing.
2.why the eating habits are changing the best way to develop healthy eating habits？
Step 4 Talking
Ask the students to take out their menus and read them carefully. Then prepare a dialogue that may happen between a customer and a waiter/waitress.
Step 5 Homework
1. Finish Period 2 in Winner.
2. Recite the following sentence.
1) You ought to be careful with fruit.
2) Take this medicine three medicine three times a day.
3) I advise you not to eat fruit that is not ripe in the future.
3.Finish Post Reading exercises at Page 4
教学反思：
1、这堂课在六班上得不大好， 计算机失灵； 在5班上得很顺， 学生的饿焦急也比较流畅， 主要原因在于铺垫比较很里， 让学生实现了自然过度。
2、对于第2段的整体理解部分表格设计得比较好， 有利于学生学会寻找信息， 提高思辩能力和分析问题能力的提高。
PERIOD 3（Reading 2）
Step 1.evision
1、Check the reciting of key sentences。
2、Check the homework
3、Teaching Aids:1.a tape recorder2.a slide projector3.a computer for multimedia use
Step 2. Post Reading
1. What does the word” fuel” mean in the text above?
What about the word “green”?
Can you find any other words used in the same way?
3. The text gives examples of how people make choices about what they eat. List the examples and the reasons why people eat or don’t eat certain kinds of food, especially about the green food.
Step3 Language points
1.Our eating habits have changed, as has our way of life.
If we want to keep up with the high pace of modern life, we’d better ,make the right choices about what and how we eat.
2.keep up with1. 跟上 2. 和...保持联系
They walked so fast that I could not keep up with them.他们走得那么快,我没法跟上。
She has kept up with some of her friends since her retirement.
3.Some nutrients help build our body and make it stronger.
buildvt.1. 建筑; 造 2. 建立;发展;增进[(+up)]
4.Fish, meat and beans contain a lot of protein.
5.Other nutrients help keep our body functioning well.
functionn.[C] 1. 功能,作用 2. 职务,职责vi.1. (机器等)工作,运行 2. 起作用[(+as)]
The teacher did not explain its grammatical function.
What is his function on the committee?
The refrigerator is not functioning well.
The sofa functions as a bed at night.
6.Vitamins help our body fight disease.
fightvt.1. 与...作战;与...斗争
fight with 和...斗争;fight for 为争取...而斗争
7.But the choice we make are not just about nutrition..
not just=not only
8.Many people make their choices about eating habits based on what they believe.
9.Organic vegetables are those that are grown without chemicals that can be harmful to human beings or the environment.
chemical
a化学的, 化学上的,化学用的 n.1. 化学制品;化学药品[C]
He devoted his life to chemical research.
He is experimenting with a new chemical.
be harmful to对什么有害(also 'do harm to')
Smoking is harmful to health.
10.Because we have so much to choose from, many companies offer advice about what we eat.to choose from
11.It is probably better if we spend our time and money on buying keeping a balanced diet. probablyad. 大概,或许,很可能（比可能性大，而且常有一定依据）
He will probably refuse the offer.
spend: spend...(in)doing; spend...(on)doing; spend...on/for sth
12.The same goes for 'crash diets' that some companies say they will make us lose weight fast.
go for适合于；对...适用
What he said about you goes for me too.
13.lose weight体重减轻
I think she might have lost a bit of weight.
put on weight/gain weight长胖
13.We ought to learn more about our body and the fuel it needs to keep fit.
fit此处：健康的;强健的You look very fit, Mike.
14.Only in this way will we be ready for the challenges and opportunities in life.
Only in this way will we...
only+状语放在句子开头要引起主句倒装
Only when you grow up will you understand the importance of learning.
Only then could he thought of me.
15.Sugar is bad for your teeth and can make you gain weight.
be bad for对什么有害
be bad for 对什么有好处
be good/bad to 对某人好/不好
18.You have a bit of a fever.
a bit有点在修饰名词时要加of
Step 4,Discussion
Work in pairs. Discuss the questions below.
1. Why do people go to fast restaurant?
2. Why is it not good for you to eat too much sugar and fat?
3. Why are crash diets and supplements so popular?
4. What can we do to keep a balanced diet?
5. Do you like green food?
6. Is it necessary to advise more people to eat green food?
Step 5. Home work
1、Recite the new words and useful expressions in Unit 13.
2、Finish Period 3 in Winners
教学反思：
3、在教学设计中我注意了绿色教育思想的渗透，加强了德育教育。
4、我没有死板地只讲语言点， 我还注意了教学剃度的自然连接。
5、语言的重点抓得比较准，学生的知识落实较好。 讨论花时间多了些， 导致同步训练没有落实， 只能通过回家作业来弥补。
Period 4
Teaching aims:
1.aims of knowledge:
1. Review the words learned in the last two periods.
2. Learn and master modal verbs:
had better, should, ought to
3.Ability aims:
1.How to guess the missing word according to the given sentence.
2. Let the students learn how to give advice or opinion about something, especially master how to use “should, ought to, had better and their negative forms” to give advice.
Teaching important points:
1.How to guess the missing word according to the given sentence.
2.Let the students learn how to give advice or opinion about something, especially master how to use “should, ought to, had better and their negative forms” to give advice.
Teaching Aids:1.a tape recorder2.a slide projector3.a computer for multimedia use
Teaching difficult points
How to correctly use “should, ought to, had better and their negative forms” to give advice.
Teaching procedures:
Step 1 Revision
Check the homework.
Step 2 Grammars
First present the students the modal sentences with Modal Verbs and ask the students to make some sentences with them.
Step 3 Consolidation
(1) Finish the exercise on P5 and on P74
(2)Take out a piece of paper with the column “Ask Ss in order to make the students understand when you are giving advice it is better to use some sentences with had better (not), and ought (not) to, should (not). Then read a passage as an example and afterwards list the points you have to pay attention to when you give advice.
1.give advice that will really help the person.
2. be polite and sincere
at last get the students to finish the following practice.
Step 4 Homework
1. Finish the exercise 3 on P74 in the students’ workbook.
2. Finish Period 3 in Winners.
教学反思：
1. 这节课注意从语境出发让学生感受情态动词的特点：表现说话人的语气和态度。
2. 讲解部分比较详细，实例举得不够全面，旧了点，应该增加一些和高考试卷的情态动词部分的效果会更好。
PERIOD 5
Teaching aims;
1. Aims of knowledge:
1.Review the useful expressions learnt in this unit by making sentences with them.
2、Review how to use some Modal verbs to give advice or opinion about something.
2.Ability aims:
Let students know how to write recopies for their favourite dishes by reading “SNACKS” and two examples of recipes.
3．Teaching Aids:1.a tape recorder2.a slide projector3.a computer for multimedia use
Teaching important points:
1. How to master Modal verbs-had better, should, ought to
2. How to let the students understand the text “SNACKS” better and learn to write a recipe.
Teaching difficult point:
How to improve the students’ integrating skills.
Teaching procedures:
Step 1 Revision
Let some students read their reply to the letters on P74.
Step 2 Pre –reading and Reading
As we all know, people have to have food in order to live in our country, corn and wheat are the main crops in the north, while rice is the main food in the south. In western countries, bread is very important. Bread to western is just like rice to Chinese in the south. It is westerners’ most widely eaten food and is often called “the staff of life”. But in actual life, sancks are3 also very important for Chinese and foreigners. Do you often eat snacks?
Read the text on P6 and then get the students to find the main idea of it (Snacks is also important. we need to learn something about snacks and the way to prepare it.)
Step 3.Language points:
1.Even if we choose nutritious food for our main meals, we probably still need to refuel now and then.
Even if=even though，即使；尽管
2.now and then=a little now and a little then; every now and then，有时候
3.Most fruits are naturally sweet and we can eat them just the way they are
just the way thay are=in the way that they are
4.There are many recipes for simple and healthy snacks that taste great
and keep us going.
Step 4 Writing
Ask the students to work in pairs to write the recipe for their favourite dish.
We may first give the tips on P7 as a guide.
Step 5 Discussions
First ask the students to read the passage on P75 and then give the following questions as the topic for the students to talk: What is a couch potato?
What does one have to pay special attention to in order to keep healthy? (food and exercise etc.)
Step 6 Homework
1.Do a general survey in order to learn about the differences between people’s eating habits and try to find which is healthier.
1.Finish Period 4 in Winner
2.Make good preparations for the dictation of Unit 13
教学反思：这堂课上得很一般， 说不上满意， 也说不上不满意， 一句话缺乏闪光点。对学生的调动不够。
Period 6-7
Step 1.Revision
Let some students read their reply to the letters
Step 2.Dictation
Have a dictation about the key sentences, new words and useful expressions in Unit 13.
Step 3.workbook
1.May I take your order, please?
take your order餐馆常用语，order：叫(菜或饮料)
2.What do you recommend?
recommend:vt.1. 推荐,介绍[(+as/for)]
Can you recommend me some new books on this subject?
3.A hamburger is a dish while the others are not.
while:而，强调对比关系
4.You should avoid eating vegetables that are grown with too many chemicals.
avoid:避免，后接ing形式
5.You must pass your driving test next time you take it.
next time:连词用法
6.There is a species of inactive people, namely the 'mouse potato.'
namely:ad. 即,那就是
Only one person can answer the question namely you.
只有一个人能回答这个问题,那就是你。
7.The best source for calories is carbohydrates.
sourcen.[C]1. (河的)源头;水源 2. 根源;来源 3. 提供消息(或证据)者;消息(或证据)来源 4. 出处;原始资料
Do you know the source of Amazon River?
They are required to publish the sources of their campaign funds.
The news comes from a reliable source.
The library has quantities of reference sources.
8.A healthy diet should include a variety of food, most of which should be rich in nutrients.
be rich in富于...的,有很多...的The country is rich in resources.
9.Vegans do not eat or use any animal products.
product:n.[C]产品,产物;产量;出产
They came here in search of new markets for their products.
Step4.Practice:“《大赢家》第13单元综合测试”试卷讲评
教学反思：这两节的教学反思觉得很难写， 我觉得自己至少讲解得很清楚， 能够联系高考从高一开始就对学生进行了高考知识和能力的训练。 我认为这是很好的一种知识与能力的储备， 有利于学生思维能力的发展。
Unit 14 Festivals
I. Teaching aims and demands 教学目标和要求:
1.Topics 话题
1。.Talking about festivals and customs
2.Function: 交际功能
表达和支持某意见(Expressing and supporting an opinion)
In my opinion we should... I believe we should... I don t think it s necessary to...
We must decide... I hope we can make a decision. If we do this,we can...
I think that...should...
3.Vocabulary 重点词汇和短语
theme; parade; holy; Easter; symbol; conflict; argument; opinion; major; probably; honour; ancestor; principle; nation; purpose; creativity; faith; commercial; joy; light; similar; generation; salute; kiss; cheek; nod; celebrate; respect; gift; cycle; fool; invitation
dress up; in one s opinion; play a trick on sb; take in
4.Grammar:语法
情态动词(2)---must, have to and have got to
1 能够用英语表达做某事的重要性或必要性---must/have to/have got to
2 能够用英语表达做某事不重要或不必要---don t have to/haven t got to
3 能够用英语坚决表达某事不可接受或不可取---must not
II. Difficult points
III. Main teaching aids教具：A tape-recorder; Multimedia, projector, role cards
Ⅳ. Main teaching methods 教法：
1. The interaction between the teacher and the students, and among the students themselves; Attention to the students’ listening, speaking, reading and writing; and so on.
2. Listening-and–answering activity to help the students go through with the listening material.
3. Use both individual work and group or pair work to make every student work and think in class
V. Teaching procedure：
Period 1
Teaching Aids:1.a tape recorder2.a slide projector3.a computer for multimedia use
Step 1 Lead-in
1. First, greet Ss with the questions “How are you feeling today?” “ Do you feel happy today?”
Then, Teacher (T) can lead in the topic festival/ holiday by asking some questions such as:
When do you usually feel happy? (Ss can give different answers)
Do you feel happy when there is a festival and you have holidays?
Then which festival or holiday do you like best? And why?
1. Chinese have many festivals. How many Chinese festivals do you know? And what are they?
( the Spring Festival, the Lantern Festival (Yuanxiao), Tomb Sweeping Festival (Qingming), Dragon Boat Festival (Duanwu), Mid-Autumn Festival, Double Ninth Festival (Chongyang), National Day, New Year’s Day, Chinese Youth Day, Party’s Day, Army’s Day, Teachers’ Day, Tree-planting Day…)
Which is the greatest and the most important festival to our Chinese people? When do Chinese celebrate the Spring Festival? How long does the Spring Festival last? Why do Chinese people celebrate it? What is the theme of the Spring Festival? How is it celebrated?
3.Different cultures have different kinds of customs and festivals. How many foreign festivals do you know? And what are they?
( Christmas, Halloween, Thanksgiving Day, Easter, Valentine’s Day, April Fool’s Day, Ramadan, Day of the Dead (from Mexico), Bon Odori Festival/ Ghost Festival (from Japan) (盂兰盆节), Mardi Gras, Kwanzaa…)
Step 2 Warming up
1. Show the Ss three pictures and ask them to discuss in pairs according to the following guiding questions:
Q1: Do you know the names of the festivals? (Halloween, Bon Odori, Day of the Dead)
Q2: Do you know which countries the festivals come from?
Q3: What are the people in the pictures doing? Why are they doing this?
2. Ask individual students to talk about the three festivals. The information of the festivals should include the name of the festival, when, where and how to celebrate it.
3. Which Chinese festival is similar to the three festivals? (Tomb Sweeping Festival)
Then get Ss to compare the Chinese Tomb Sweeping Festival with one of the three festivals. (Differences: time, people, place, the way of celebrating, etc. Similarity: ghost festival)
Step 3 Dialogue
Get Ss to work in pairs to make up a dialogue. One describes his/her favorite Chinese festival and the other describes his/her favorite foreign festival. Trying to compare them.
(The following form is presented for Ss to prepare.)
Festival Time Customs
When is the festival celebrated?
Who celebrates the festival?
How do people celebrate it?
Why do people celebrate it?
What are some important themes, “family” and “peace”?
How old is the festival?
Step 4 Listening
1. Pre-listening: Present three pictures about Mardi Gras, Ramadan and Easter and let Ss to guess out the names of the festivals from what they can see from the pictures.
2. While-listening: Do the three festivals one by one. For each one, Ss can listen to it twice. The first time, Ss’ task is to find correct answers to the choices in the book. The second time, Ss’ task is to check their answers and T check the correct answers with the whole class.
3. Post-listening: Get Ss to listen to each festival again. While listening, try to take notes and get more information about the festival. Then ask Ss to describe the three festivals in their own words.
Step 5 Summary
Help Ss to have a revision of the festivals learnt in this class.
T: Different histories and cultures have different kinds of festivals and customs. We should get to know they all play important parts in learning a country’s language. We should respect and show positive attitudes towards foreign festivals and customs as well as Chinese ones.
Step 6 Homework
1. Listening work: Listen to the listening material about Christmas in workbook on page 77.
2. Written work: Write a description of your favorite festival. The description should include 1) the name 2) the time 3) characteristics 4) activities, etc.
3. Finish Period 1 in Winners
4. Preview Reading for the next period.
教学反思：
1、这节课贯彻了交际性的听说课教学原则--交际充分。
2、对话的表格化线索降低了学生口头表达的难度。
3、听力的难度较大， 我使用了提示语来帮助学生克服困难，效果还比较好。
4、说的部分学生的文化基础较表达比较困难， 说明我的铺垫做得不够。
Period 2: Reading
Step 1 Revision
1、Check the homework exercises
2．Get Ss to work in pairs to match the festivals in Column A with the information in Column B.
Column A Column B
1.Ramada A. celebrated on the 15th day of the first Chinese lunar month
2.the Lantern Festival B. chocolate, bunnies, colored eggs for its symbols
3.Mardi Gras C. Muslims fast during the daylight day
4.Dragon Boat Festival D. catching “beads, doubloons and cups” thrown by parades
5.Valentine’s Day E. honoring love and lovers
6.Halloween F. eating Zongzi to honor Qu Yuan
7.Double Ninth Festival G. the time of ghosts, spirits, gravestones
8.Thanksgiving Day H. meaning clear and bright, mourning the dead
9.Easter I. offering thanks, family gatherings and meals
10.Tomb Sweeping Festival J. on the 9th day of the 9th lunar month as Senior
Step 2 Pre-reading
1. Make a comparison of Chinese Spring Festival and Christian Christmas.
T: Which is the greatest and the most important festival to Chinese people? (the Spring Festival) And which is the greatest and the most important festival to Christian people in western countries? (Christmas)
Both of them are quite popular in the world. What are the differences between them?
Festival
aspects Chinese Spring Festival
Christmas
Time From the 1st day to the 15th day of the first Chinese lunar month On Dec. 25
Preparation Do spring cleaning, do Spring Festival shopping (new clothes, delicious food, fireworks, New Year paintings, etc.), decorate the houses with Spring Festival couplets, paper cuts, Chinese knots… Do cleaning, do Christmas shopping (gifts, cards, sweet, cookies, etc.), decorate the houses with Christmas tree and colored lights…
Special Food New Year’s cake, dumpling ( jiaozi) , sweet dumpling (tangyuan)… Candies, cookies, pudding…
Gifts Anything (foods, fruits, clothes, drinks…) Anything (foods, fruits, drinks, desserts,Christmasdecorations)
Major Activities Have family reunion dinner on New Year’s Eve, pay New Year’s visits, recreational activities (dragon dance, lion dance, stilt-walking…) Family reunion, have a big dinner on Christmas Eve…
purpose Bidding farewell to the old year and welcoming the new year, hoping for the best and the good future. Celebrating the birth of Jesus Christ
Note: The italicized words in the form above are suggested answers.
Step 3 Reading
T: Do you know there is another festival which follows Christmas Day in America. It is an important festival to African Americans. Is there any one who knows the name of the festival? SS:Kwanzaa.
1.Fast reading: Read the text on page 10 fast and try to get a general idea of Kwanzaa from the text. T can present a diagram of the information about Kwanzaa to help Ss to finish this task.
Questionnaire: When is Kwanzaa celebrated? How long does it last?
Who created the festival of Kwanzaa? (Dr Maulana Karenga) Who usually celebrates Kwanzaa? Why is it celebrated? What are the characteristics of Kwanzaa?)
1. Careful reading: Get Ss to read the text carefully to get more details. After reading, Ss are asked to do True or False exercises.
1) African Americans have a long history and a rich culture, so Kwanzaa is an old festival. ( F ) (a young festival)
2) People created Kwanzaa to celebrate American culture. ( F ) ( to celebrate African culture)
3) The word Kwanzaa means first fruit in Swahili, one of the largest languages in Africa. ( T )
4) The African first-fruit festivals are completely different from each other. ( F ) ( to have many things in common )
5) Kwanzaa is celebrated on Christmas Day. ( F ) ( from Dec. 26 to Jan. 1 )
6) Kwanzaa is based on old African festivals. ( T )
7) People who celebrate Kwanzaa light a candle for each of the seven principles. ( T )
2. Dialogue.
Suppose you are the reporter of Overseas Wind Programme of Huipu Students’ Broadcasting. Now you are chosen to interview the foreign teacher John about the festival of Kwanzaa. Make up a dialogue with your partner. One acts the role of the reporter, and the other acts the role of John. The dialogue can begin like this:
Reporter (R): Good afternoon, everyone. Here is our Overseas Wind Programme. Today, we have a foreign guest in our progamme. He is our foreign teacher John. Hello, John.
John (J): Hello.
R: Welcome to our Overseas Wind Programme. Today we have a topic about the festival of Kwanzaa. So would you like to introduce Kwanzaa to us? …
J: …
Step 4 Discussion
Topic1: Do you agree festivals can help us understand our history and culture? How do they help us understand our history and culture?
Topic2: Nowadays more and more festivals have been created in my cities for various purposes, such as developing local economy, making the city well-known, etc. Our city Linhai created the Festival of the Great Wall in the South. It has been celebrated for three years. However, some Linhainese think holding such a festival causes some problems to the city. What effects does the Festival of the Great Wall in the South bring to us? Make a list
Good Effects Bad Effects
。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。
Step 5. Homework
1. Oral Work: Read and recite the new words learnt in this class.
Read and recite some beautiful and useful sentences in the text.
2. Written Work: Suppose you are the journalist of Huipu Sunshine Magazine. You are going to write a passage about Kwanzaa.
3. Finish Period 2 in Winners
教学反思：
这节课处理得比较好的地方在于：
一、读前通过对于圣诞节和春节的对比引入阅读教学；
二、读中的图表阅读线索分析能够充分调动学生的积极性， 促进了学生思维能力的提高和发展。
Period 3/4 Language Study & Grammar
Step 1 Revision
Get Ss to have revision of the text The Birth of Kwanzaa. Ss are required to answer the following questions about Kwanzaa.
Q1: Who created Kwanzaa?
Q2: Is it a young or an old festival? When was it born?
Q3: When is Kwanzaa celebrated?
Q4: Who celebrate the festival of Kwanzaa?
Q5: Why is it celebrated?
Q6: What are the characteristics of Kwanzaa?
Then T can ask individual Ss to give a short talk about Kwanzaa according to the questions above.
Step 2 Language points (in the text The Birth of Kwanzaa)
T: Now we have a good knowledge of Kwanzaa by reading the text. And there are some useful and important words and expressions in the text as well. It is necessary for us to learn and master them well. What useful words and expressions have you found from the text?
1. Let Ss do a word matching exercise to check whether Ss master the new words well.
1. nation A. a strong wish to succeed in doing something
2. faith B. large community of people; country
3. determination C. belief in something or someone
4. purpose D. an action meant to deceive (欺骗) someone
5. generation E. a reason for doing something
6. ancestor F. the people born at a certain time
7. peace G. a person in your family who lived a long time ago
8. trick H. quietness and calm
(suggested answers:1-B 2-C 3-A 4-E 5-F 6-G 7-H 8-D )
Then check answers to the exercises in Word Study on Page 13.
(suggested answers: theme, faith, purpose, nations, determination, joy, ancestors, birth, peace, treated)
2. Deal with the language points in the text. Get Ss to enjoy the text by listening to the tape. Ask Ss to read after the tape in low voice, and pay attention to the pronunciation, intonation and pause while listening.
1) Kwanzaa is a seven-day festival celebrating the culture and history of African Americans.（现在分词作后置定语，表示名词中心词与分词是主动关系。）
Kwanzaa is a seven-day festival created to celebrate the culture and history of AfricanAmericans.（过去分词作后置定语，表示名词中心词与分词是被动关系。）
The dog following Mr. Wang into the room is my dog.
The man followed by a group of students is our teacher, Mr. Wang.
2) The week following Christmas Day, many African-American families get together to greet the new year and think about the past.
get together: 聚会
On New Year’s Eve we Chinese get together for a family reunion dinner
get somebody together:把…聚集起来
Every Monday morning, our school leaders get all the students together to have a meeting.
get-together n.聚集
Every year my classmates in junior middle school have a get-together.
3)…so that… 表示目的
He works hard so that he can get high marks in the exam.
…so+adj.+that 从句
He works so hard that he gets high marks in the exam.
4) in common 共同
Mr. and Mrs. Li own the store in common.
have something/nothing in common (with sth.) （与…）有共同点
I have nothing in common with my sister.
5) honour (=honor Am.E) n./v.
n. [ C ] “ 荣幸，使感到光荣的人或事”, 一般用单数形式。
To host the 29th Olympic Games is a great honour for China.
v. Every year we honour our past relatives and ancestors before a memorial in Tomb Sweeping Festival.
I felt highly honoured when the teacher spoke highly of me before classmates.
in one’s honour; in honour of something/somebody.为了纪念、尊敬某人/某事
Dragon Boat Festival is created in honour of the famous poet Quyuan.
6) as well as 与…一样好， 不仅…而且
She cooks as well as her mother.
Christine can speak Japanese as well as English
His children as well as his well were invited to the party.
A as well as B …谓语动词单复词由A决定
7）nation, country, state 三者的区别
三个都有“国家”的意思，但侧重点不同。
nation着重指人民、民族、国民。
The whole nation was in deep sorrow at this bad news.
country着重指疆土、国土、家园，也可指一个人的祖国或国籍所在， 还可指乡村。e.g. The soldier fought bravely for their country.
state着重指政策、政权、政府和国家机器， 还可指组成国家的州，特别是美国。e.g. Highways in China belong to the state./ How many states are there in the United States of America.
8) purpose: with/ for the purpose of (doing) something 表目的
He went to the supermarket for the purpose of buying something to eat.
on purpose 故意地，特意地
I came here on purpose to see you .
9) faith: have/ lose faith in…对…有/失去信心
I have faith in you, you will do it well.
Keep/break faith with somebody 对…某人守/不守信用
We will not treat him as our friend as he breaks faith with us.
10) believe in … 信仰，信任，赞成
We believe in his good character.
11) light v. (lighted/ lighted; lit/ lit)
Step 4 Grammar
1. Presentation : Present a sign “No Rubbish”
Ask Ss “What can you see in the sign?” “What does the sign tell us?” “Can we throw rubbish in this place?”“Where must we throw the rubbish?” “What should we do if we cannot find a dustbin at once?”
T presents the following two sentences on the screen.
①We mustn’t throw the rubbish in the place with a sign“No Rubbish”, and we must throw the rubbish into the dustbin.
②We have to keep the rubbish in hand or in a plastic bag until we find a dustbin, if we cannot find a dustbin at once.
2. Get Ss to compare the two sentences above and explain how to use the modal verbs“must” & “have to”.
must is often used when you think that it is necessary to do something. have to is often used when someone else thinks it is necessary or there seems to be no other choice.
must is used to talk about an obligation that depends on the person speaking or listening, while have to is generally used to talk about obligations that come from “outside”.
must--subjective have to --objective
I must be back by ten every night.( I think it is necessary for me to be back by ten every night.)
I have to be back by ten every night. ( I don’t want to be back by ten every night, maybe my mother thinks it’s necessary.)
3. Tell Ss in informal English, “have got to” can be used instead of “have to”. e.g. It is getting late,
I’m afraid I have got to (=have to) go.
4. Forms in tense & Negative form
forms in tense: must, must have to, had to
negative form:
must--must not(mustn’t)(=not be allowed=be forbidden)
have to -- do not have to (don’t have to)(=needn’t)
e.g. It is a secret, you mustn’t tell others.
It is none of your business, I don't have to tell you about this.
Step 5 Practice
1. Look at the following table of greeting manners. Decide which are necessary and which are not. Make sentences using must, have to or negative forms.
Greeting manners
get off the bike when you greet someone salute
bow kiss on the cheek
nod hug
smile look into the eyes
take off your hat shake hands
Example: When you greet a friend who you know very well, you don’t have to shake hands.
If you want to make friends with someone, you have to smile more often.
2. Suppose you are spending the Spring Festival at your grandparents’ house. Complete the sentences with have got to.
1) Your school starts tomorrow, so you have got to go back today.
2) You broke your grandma’s favourite vase, so
3) Your parents went back to work three days ago, so
4) Your grandparents have give you quite a lot of money, so
5) You have done your homework all wrong, so
6) You do not know when you should go to school tomorrow, so
7) _______________________, so ______________________
8) ______________________, so________________________
Step 6 Discussion
Ask Ss to have a discussion of Dos and Don'ts at school, using the modal verbs: must & have to
Dos Don’ts
We must keep the classroom clean. We mustn’t jump the queue in thedining hall.
We have to wear school uniforms We don’t have to use credit card in the every day.
Step 7 Homework
1. Make sentences with the following expressions: get together, in common, honour (v./n.), as well as, with/for the purpose of (doing) sth., have/lose faith in …
2. Finish off the grammar exercises in Workbook
3. Collect information about Earth Day, Martin Luther King, Jr Day, Day of the Dead, and April Fool’s Day.
教学反思：
1、这两节课语言点处理得比较好， 抓住了单元的重点， 思路分析到位。另外，选用的课件设计水平很高对教学起到了很好的辅助作用。
2、这个单元的语法-情态动词比较难处理， 我坚持从语境出发效果还可以。如果在增加几个同步的练习，其效果会更好。
Period 5 Speaking & Integrating Skills
Teaching Aids:
1.a tape recorder
2.a slide projector
3.a computer for multimedia use
Step 1 Lead in
In this unit, we have learnt a variety of festivals in the world, and as we know all of them celebrate different things, so their themes are quite different. What themes of the festivals do you know? ( peace, family, environment, nature, memory of great men, etc.)
Step 2 Reading (Integrating skills)
1. Get Ss to read the four festivals Earth Day, Martin Luther King, Jr Day, Day of the Dead, and April Fool’s Day, and try to get information about each one as much as possible.
2. Ask Ss following questions about each festival.
(Earth Day): When is Earth Day celebrated? What does it celebrate?
What does it tell us? What could we do to celebrate Earth Day?
(Martin Luther King, Jr Day): When is Martin Luther King, Jr Day celebrated? When did it become a national holiday? What is the theme of the holiday? What do you think “A Day On, Not A Day Off!” means? Martin Luther King, Jr Day is created in honour of Martin Luther King, are there any other great men or women whose memory should be celebrated? How would you celebrate the memory of them?
(Day of the Dead):Is it an old festival? What does it come from? What’s the theme of Day of the Dead? What do people do on that day? Why do so many festivals honour our ancestor?
(April Fool’s Day): What do people do on April Fool’s Day? Have you ever heard of an April Fool’s trick? What happened? What do we call the person who is taken in?
Step 3 Speaking
Suppose our country is going to create a new holiday, and there are four choices. They are Peace Day, Happiness Day, Friendship Day, and Nature Day. What Day of the four days do you think is the best one?
Fist, get Ss to discuss in pairs.
Then, ask individual Ss to report their decision using the following structures:
I think that the new holiday should be________. On this day, ________are allowed. People will __________. The holiday will be celebrated on _________and people will celebrate by______________. I think this is the best idea because___________.
Step 4 Tasks
Task 1: Design your new favourite holiday or festival and give reasons.
Report your new holiday or festival, using the following expressions:
In my opinion, we should… I believe we should…
I don’t think it is necessary to… We must decide…
I hope we can make a decision. If we do this, we can…
Task 2: Create your own festival. Get Ss to write a short description of their created festival according to the form below.
Name of the festival: ________________________________
Date: __________________________________________
Meaning: _________________________________________
Principles: __________________________________________
How is the festival celebrated? ___________________________
What is the symbol of the festival? _______________________
Step 5 Writing
T: Now you have created your new festival, you may want your friends to join the celebration of your new festival. So you should invite your friends to attend your celebration activity. Then how will you invite your friends? Here an invitation is needed.
T can present a sample of invitation and tell Ss how to write an invitation. Information needed in an invitation should include: what, when, who, why, and where? (see tips on page14)
Sample:
Dear Mr. and Mrs. Silver,
We are having a small At-home party with a few close friends at our house on Tuesday, February 3rd, at 7:00 o’clock.
We should be very pleased if you could honour us with your company.
Sincerely yours,
John Brown
Step 6. 书信文体的写作特点：
1、分三段写：第一段说明写信的目的； 第二段回复对方的要求； 第三段、要求与问候。
2、以第一或第二人称为主， 以现在时态为主；
Step 7.Practice
Write a letter to your favourite star.
Step 8.Homework
1. Writing: Use the information about the festival you have created to write an invitation. Your invitation letter should explain your festival and tell the guest how it will be celebrated.
2. Make good preparations for the dictation of Unit 14
3.Finish Period 4 in Winners
教学反思：
1、这节课以说带动写。通过充分的交际， 先让学生积累必要的语言素材， 同时为后面的作文的处理创造良好的条件。这一点今后要坚持。
2、作文的讲解， 我先介绍课本的范文， 再介绍书信类赎买内表达的特征，最后布置当堂写作训练和讲评。
3回家作业量适宜，再布置一个写作练习作为课堂写作训练的延续。
Period 6
Step 1. Revision
Check the homework exercises
Step 2.Composition Correcting
常见错误:
1. 句子结构混乱， 体现在状态与动作混淆；
2. 书信格式错误；
3. 句子中的关键词选用不当；
4. 语法错误和逻辑错误；
Step 3 Integrating skills
After fast reading, do the following True-or-False exercises.
1. Our body doesn’t need to refuel if we choose nutritious food for our main meals.
2. Good snacks should come from different food groups and should not have too much fat or sugar.
3. Fruits and vegetables don’t give us any vitamins.
4. Most fruits need cooking.
5. Fruits and vegetables are the only healthy snacks.参考答案：1. F 2.T 3.F 4.F 5F
Step 3 Listening to the Passage
Step 4 Reading comprehension
1.After fast reading, discuss these questions with your partner.
2.We can do a lot of things or organize some activities that improve or protect the environment, for example cleaning up the school yard, picking up trash, planting trees etc.There are several similar festivals or days in China that are devoted to the environment and helping people in the community, e.g. tree-planting day and Lei-Feng Day Have a short discussion.
3.To have “a day off” means to stay at home from work for a day, usually to relax. A “day on” means that although an American doesn’t work that day, they should do something serious to honour the man for whom the holiday is given.It is not a time for us to rest, but a time to think about and do something important and great.
Give the students some explanations when necessary.
Step 5 Writing
Sample festival creations:
Name of the festival Space Flight day
Date October 15th
Meaning Remembering the unforgettable day when the first manned space flight was successfully made
Principles Creativity collective work unity love
How is the festival celebrated Making model spaceship
The symbol Wearing clothes with five stars
Name of the festival Grandparent’s Day
Date April 15
Meaning To honour the hard work and caring
Principles Respect dignity
How is it celebrated? Children vist or call their grandparents
The symbol The Chinese character for long life
Step 6.总结扩展
Step 6 Necessary language points
Today we ve done some listening and speaking, and learn how to give advice and some everyday English used between doctors and patients.
3. Integrating skills
1.It is the reminder that we need to care about the world we live in.
reminder [用法]n.[C]1. 提醒者,提醒物,令人回忆的东西
2. 提示,帮助记忆的记号
2.The festival honours both the living and the dead.
the living and the dead [用法]the+形容词表示一类
3.It is not a sad day, but rather a time to celebrate the cycle of life.
cycle:n.[C]1. 周期;循环;一转 2. 整个系列;整个过程 3. 脚踏车;摩托车
vi./vt. (使)循环,轮转 vi. 骑脚踏车(或摩托车)
[举例]The seasons of the year make a cycle. 一年四季构成一个循环。
I cycled to the beach. 我骑车去海滩。
4.Our friends play tricks on us and try to fool us.
trick [用法]n. 1. 诡计;骗局;谋略;花招 2. 恶作剧 3.戏法,把戏;特技,妙计
vt./vi.1. 哄骗
[举例]He got into the castle by a trick. 他耍了个花招混进了城堡。
Daily practice is the trick in learning a foreign language.
每天练习是学会一门外语的诀窍。
No one understood how I did the card trick.
谁也没有看出来我是怎样玩纸牌戏法的。
5.If a person is taken in, he or she is called April Fool .
take in [用法]1. 让...进入;接受 2. （此处）欺骗
Step 7 Homework
1、Finish Winners Period4Unit 14
2、Make good preparations fot the dictation of Unit 14
教学反思：这节课以听带动泛读是一种新的教学尝试,效果还可以,至少学生的学习积极性比较高。
高一第十五单元The Nechlace
I. Teaching aims and demands 教学目标和要求:
1.Topics 话题
1.Talking about drama and theatre
2.Talking about the play The Necklace
2.Function: 交际功能 征求许可(Ask for permission)
Could we/I...? May/Can I...? Shall we...? Is it possible...? Do you mind...?
讨论可能(Talk about possibilities)
It can t be... It could... He might... They must...
3.Vocabulary 重点词汇和短语
dormitory; recognise; surely; diamond; explain; ball; jewellery; franc; continue; lovely; debt; precious; positive; attend; earn; lecture; silly; mosquito; bat; besides; outline; plot; quality
call on; bring back; day and night; pay off; at most; act out
4.Grammar:语法
情态动词(3)---must, can/could, may/might
1 能够用英语有把握地猜测某人或某事物现在的情况---must/can t
2 能够用英语不十分有把握地猜测某人或某事物现在的情况---can/may/could/might
II. Difficult points
III. Main teaching aids教具：A tape-recorder; Multimedia, projector, role cards
Ⅳ. Main teaching methods 教法：
1. The interaction between the teacher and the students, and among the students themselves; Attention to the students’ listening, speaking, reading and writing; and so on.
2. Listening-and–answering activity to help the students go through with the listening material.
3. Use both individual work and group or pair work to make every student work and think in class
Period 1
Ⅰ.Teaching Goals:
1.Talk about drama and theatre.
2.Use the modal verbs:must,can/could,may/might
(1)ask for permission;(2)ask about possibilities
3.Write and act a simple play.
Ⅱ.Teaching Time:
Five periods
Ⅲ.Background Information：
1.About the Author
Guy de Maupassant,the well-known French shortstory writer and novelist,was born on August 5,1850.When he was young,he had a great interest in literature.He practised writing literary works under the guidance of the famous novelist Flaubert.And Balzac was another teacher of his.So he wrote in the tradition of 19th century French realism,and became one of the most famous French critical realists of the late 19th century.
Maupassant's stories were built around the everyday life of the simple humble people.He had a fine use of irony.His style was direct and simple,with attention to realistic details.He saw clearly the toil,sufferings and the bitterly ironic happenings in human lives.At his best,he was able to put into a few pages a life story which would take other writers a whole volume to describe.
Most of Maupassant's works are about the peasant life in Normandy,the France-Prussian War and the life of the petty bourgeoisie.As he had held a number of government positions in Parice since 1871,he became familiar with the life of the government workers.And this experience helped him create his best short story“The Diamond Necklace”,from which our present text is adapted.Almost a hundred years after its first publication the story still touches the readers deeply to their hearts.
Maupassant suffered a great deal from illness in his late life.Yet he struggled to continue writing with tremendous will power.He had but a short life,and died at the age of 43(on July 6,1893).
2.About the Text
This short play is a stage version of The Necklace,one of Maupassant's best-known short stories.It tells about a vain woman,wife of a small clerk,who borrowed a diamond necklace to go to the palace ball.But unfortunately she lost the necklace.Then she and her husband had to work ten long years to pay for it.
The heroine was named Mathilde,who used to be a pretty girl.Being born in a clerk's family,she had no hope of marrying a man of wealth and position.So she let herself be married to Pierre Loisel,a small clerk in a government office.They were not rich and lived a simple life.
One evening her husband brought home an invitation for the palace ball.It was the first time in their lives that they had been invited to an important occasion like this.But the wife did not feel happy at all,because she had no dress for the ball.As the ball was very important to Pierre,he decided to buy her a new dress,which cost about four hundred francs.That was all he had saved.But Mathilde had no jewellery and she didn't want to go to the palace without jewelley.Her husband suggested that she should go and borrow some jewellery from a rich friend of hers,Jeanne Forrestier.Jeanne was very kind and friendly.She brought out her jewelry for Mathilde to choose from.Mathilde borrowed a diamond necklace.
Mathilde was the prettiest woman that night at the palace.She was a great success.All the men wished to dance with her.She danced madly,forgetting herself,her husband,her home and all.
On the way home Mathilde found that the necklace was gone.She and her husband returned to the palace and looked for it in every room but couldn't find it,and they never saw it again.They had to borrow thirty-six thousand francs,buy a diamond necklace exactly like the one they had lost and return it to Jeanne.Then they worked hard for ten years to pay for the money.
At the end of ten hard years,Mathilde had changed a great deal and looked so old that Jeanne couldn't recognize her when they met in a park one day.When Jeanne heard Mathilde's story,she was amazed.She told Mathilde that the necklace she had lent her ten years before was made of glass.It was worth five hundred francs at the most.
IV.Teaching Aids:
1.a tape recorder
2.a slide projector
3.a computer for multimedia use
Period 2
Teaching Aims:
1.Learn and master the following words:
footprint shoeprint fingerprint tire mystery mysterious scary dormitory
2.Do some listening.
3.Do some speaking by acting out some short plays.
Teaching Important Points:
1.Do listening and speaking practice.
2.Improve the students' listening ability.
3.Improve the students speaking ability by acting out some short plays in English.
Teaching Difficult Points:
1.How to finish the task of speaking.
2.How to make up short plays.
Teaching Methods:
1.Warming up to arouse the students' interest in creating good stories.
2.Listening-and-choosing activity to help the students go through with the listening material and understand it.
3.Making and acting out simple plays to practise the students' speaking ability.
4.Individual,pair or group work to make every student work in class.
Teaching Aids:
1.a tape recorder
2.a slide projector
3.a computer for multimedia use
Teaching Procedures:
Step Ⅰ. Greetings
Greet the whole class as usual.
Step Ⅱ. Lead-in
T:Have you read thrilling and exciting stories?
S1:Yes,I've read one.It is Huckleberry Finn.It was written by Mark Twain.It tells us something about a boy who met with much danger and trouble.
T:Have you seen the soul-stirring film?
S2:Yes.I have seen the film“Titanic”.It tells us that the largest and finest ship at that time sank because it hit an iceberg.It is terrible to see the ship sink under the sea.
T:I think most of you have seen the film.It is really a good and soul-stirring film.It won its Oscar.It is well worth seeing.OK.Which of you had adventurous experience?
S3:I had one.
T:Would you like to tell us your experience?
S3:I'd love to.One afternoon when I went home after school,I found our door open.Suddenly I felt something happen.It was a thief who broke into my house.I was about to leave for help when the thief saw me,He tied me to a chair and took away our money and some valuable things.It took me an hour to untie the rope and call the police.
T:What an advanture experience!Sometimes,all of us are likely to be in trouble.What should we do when we get into trouble?Now we'll have a discussion in pairs.Begin,please.
(After two minutes,teacher collects some advice from the students and shows them on the screen.)
Dos
Find a good chance to get rid of dangerous situation
Call 110 for help.
Ask neighbours for help.
Use your clever head to defeat the other.
Don'ts
Don't enter the dangerous situation.
Don't fight with him,for you are weak.
…
T:Your advice is very good.
Step Ⅲ. Warming up
T:Today a foreign senior boy and a Chinese senior girl are travelling on a small island.They have adventurous experience.Now open your books and look at the pictures in Unit 15.Make up a story about something happening to the boy and the girl.Prepare it in four groups.
(Teacher gives students enough time to prepare it.Then ask one group to read the story.)
T:(After some minutes.)Are you ready?Now I'll ask one group to read the story to the whole class.Which group will try?
Group 2:A foreign senior boy and a Chinese senior girl were travelling on a small island when they met an old wise man with long beard.They talked with the man,who had a map in his hand.He told them there were valuables in a certain castle according to the map.So the boy and the girl came to a secret chambers in a mysterious castle on the island and they found a box full of jewellery.They were very excited.And they were thinking about what to do when a huge monster appeared.The monster was angry with them and began to run after them.They were frightened and ran quickly.But the monster went on running after them and they couldn't get away from the monster.At that time the wise old man suddenly appeared before them and helped them leave the dangerous situation.At last he told them that everyone liked treasures.But only when we worked hard by hand to get treature could we own them.
T:Thank you for your story.
Step Ⅳ. Listening
T:Now let'
篇14：Unit15 The Necklace(人教版高一英语下册教案教学设计)
Teaching Aims and Demands
Teaching aims: to get students to know some knowledge about dramas and plays by learning the short play written by Maupssant To get the students to master the modal verbs :must can could may might and to enable students to learn how to write a play and encourage them to act it out
Words and Phrases
Master the following words and phrases : dormitory explain recognise precious positive attend earn continue besides surely ball lecture silly author outline quality call on bring back day and night pay off at most act out come up with try on would rather be worth after all
Communicative English:
Ask for permission
Could we/I … ?
May/can I …?
Shall we …?
Is it possible…?
Do you mind…?
Talk about possibilies
It can’t be …
It could …
HE might …
They must …
Grammar:
Use the modal verbs must, can/could, may/might
Certainty possibility impossibility
He must /could/may/might can’t be working.
He must /could/may/might can’t be American.
Important points: to get the students to receive the education morally.
Difficult points: to fell the real meaning of the modal verbs.
Teaching aids: Computer, tape-recorder
Ways of Teaching: communicative teaching methodology
Period one
Step 1 greetings
Greet the whole class as usual
Step 1 Presentation
If it is possible, it is better to show the play to the students so that we can get the students mentally prepared for the coming class. If it is not possible, teachers can give a brief introduction about dramas and plays.
Step 2 Warming Up
First, ask the students to look at the pictures and describe what they think is happening in their own words. It is better to ask the students to act it out.
Step 3 Listening
Have a short listening test as shown in the students books and check the answers.
Step 4 Acting
(1) First divide the students into several groups. And then let them choose their favorite title.
(2) Read the short play one by one so as to better understand the play.
(3) Give the students several minutes to prepare for the play.
(4) At last act it out.
Step 5 Homework
Finish the exercise on the textbook
Period two
Step 1 Revision
Check the homework. and review some of the new words and expressions:dormitory explain recognise precious positive attend day and night pay off at most act out come up with
Step 2 Presentation
First, introduce the general idea of the novel to the students as well as the writer.
Step 3 Reading
Get the students to read the play on scene by one scene and answer some questions in order to help the students to fully understand what the play is about.
Scene one
1.When and where did the story happen?
2. Why didn’t Jeanne recognize Mathilde at first?
3. What was the life Mathilde lived in the past ten years like?
4. Why did Mathilde borrow a necklace from her friend?
5. Why had she been working very hard?
Scene two
1. How did Mathilde feel when she heard the news?
2. Why was Mathilde worried?
3. How much did her dress cost her?
4. What else did she want to wear?
5. What did Pierre suggest?
6. What did they solve the puzzling problems?
Scene three
1. What kind of necklace did she get?
2. What did they do when they found that they lost the necklace?
3. How much did the diamond necklace cost?
4. What did they do in order to pay back the debt?
5.How did Jeanne feel when she knew the truth?
Step 4 Language points
Explain the language points in the text. ( I think it is better to explain the language after the understanding of the text so the students will get a whole story.)
1) after all
⑴It’s not surprising you’re tired. After all, you didn’t go to bed until 12 last night.
I think we should let her go on holiday alone. 她毕竟十五岁了，不再是个小孩了。
⑵Although they met with difficulties， I hear they’ve succeeded after all。I did promise to buy a car for you，但实在对不起，我实在无能为力了。
2) marry/be married (to)/ get married (to)
She married a Frenchman.
He got married to a world-famous model last week.
Are you single or married?
Is he married ?/Has he got married?
He married her daughter to a blind but rich man.
他们结婚已有十年了. So far, they have been married for ten years.
3) call on sb call at sp visit/sb./sp pay a visit to sb./sp. drop in on /at
4) pay back 偿还 pay off 还清/pay for
You have to pay back the money you borrowed.
At last he paid off the debts.
Have you paid all your debts?
I have paid 20 yuan for the tapes.
Here the workers are paid by the hour.
Once we have paid off the store, we shall owe money to no one.
5) worth/wothyThis VCD is worth 1,000 yuan..
What you said is worth considering
Our school is worth a visit.
Our school is worth visiting
It is worth visiting our school.
Our school is worthy of being visited.
Our school is worthy to be visited.
Period three
Step 1.Revision
Check the home work and ask the students to retell the play in their own words.
Step 2 Word Study
Check the exercise about words on P19.
Step 3 Grammar
List all the modal verbs that we are going to learn on the blackboard
Step 4 Practice
Use the exercise on P19 to check if the students has really understand the use of the modal verb.
Step 5 Workbook
Check the exercises in the workbook.
Step 6 Homework
Finish the exercises on the workbook and do some translation
1他和他兄弟为了养家糊口而日夜操劳
2凡是看过这本书的人都认为不值得去读
3你还记得三星期前的一个下午我们一起去打网球吗？
4这就是他想要知道的事情
5我想他没有四十岁，至多三十五岁
6他们结婚有十年了
7Jim欠债了，他必须要干几份活来还债
Period four
Step 1 Revision
Check the homework by doing exercise 1 in part Grammar in the workbook..
Step 2 Reading
First play the tape for the students for one time then ask the students to read the dialogue on P20-21.then,answer the questions
1) when and where did the story happen?
2) How many characters are there in this dialogue?
3) Do they know anything about plays?
4) Have they tried writing plays of their owns?
5) In order to write a play, what should we do first?
Step 4 Discussion
Ask students the questions on P16so that we can make sure that they really understand what a play is.
Step 5 Writing
Then, according to what they have just discussed,ask the students to write a short play after class
Step 6 Homework
Finish the left exercises of this unity
Try to retell the story to the whole class
The end
篇15：高一英语新教材下册详细教案 (人教版高一英语下册教案教学设计)
Teaching aims :
Knowledge: amusement, attraction, divide, unlike, risk one’s life, fall though,
Be ready to do, race against, next to, space, combine…with…,
Entertain, seem, so…that…, scream one’s way etc.
Ability: 1. Enable the students to talk about entertainment places.
2. Enable the students to ask and give directions
3. Train the students’ listening, speaking, reading and writing abilities
Moral lesson: To develop the Ss’ feelings of loving life and this colorful world
Important points: a. To master the uses of some words and phrases
b. The-ing form -----used as Adverbial
Difficult points: a. How to ask and give directions
b. How to understand the texts quickly and well
Teaching methods: asking and answering, practicing, scan & skim reading
Teaching aids: a tape recorder, a blackboard and a slide projector
Teaching periods: 5 periods
The first period
Warming-up, listening and speaking
文化背景介绍
娱乐公园就是所有人工建成的娱乐性露天场所的总称。根据西方的发展情况，它可分为狭义娱乐公园、主题公园、传统公园和电车公园四类
狭义娱乐公园（Amusement Park ）---以缆车、竞技、美食为特征的娱乐设施，有的娱乐公园还有表演。
主题公园(Theme Park )--- 所有的缆车、吸引物、表演和建筑都围绕着一个或一组中心主题的娱乐公园。例如迪斯尼公园
传统公园(Traditional Park )---强调缆车游戏，而且没有给吸引物赋予主题的娱乐公园。
电车公园(Trolley Park )---以创建于19世纪末和20世纪初为代表的，由路面电车公司为了招揽周末业务而建造的娱乐公园。
Step I. Greetings
Step II. Lead- in
T: The summer vacation is coming. We’ll have time to have a good rest.
Maybe some of you will be take to travel. As is known to us, on the the beautiful parks that make this world full of fun are the places which tourists must visit. This unit we’ll learn sth about them. First let’s read the
New words and phrases in this unit.
Step III. Warming-up
T: Now please turn to page 64 to look at the four pictures in Warming-up
And answer the following questions:
Where were these pictures taken ?
What are the things in the pictures called ?
Have you tried any of these things?
Where did you try them ?
What other equipments can you find in these parks? 答案在板书中
If you haven’t, would you like to ? Why or why not ?
(Give the students several minutes to discuss then collect their answers )
Suggested answers:
Activity Reasons for liking it Reasons for disliking it
Roller coasters Exhilarating experience Awful
Bungee jumping Adventurous; exciting Causing injury
Free fall rides Stimulating Full of danger
Fast cars Giving great pleasure Feeling tense
Scary films Looking for thrills Frightening
Step IV Listening
T: Now look at the part of Listening. We are going to hear something about two parks. It will tell us the theme of each park and the reasons why they choose the park. I’ll play the tape three times.
For the first time, you just listen to get a general idea. Then listen to the
Tape a second time and do the exercise. At last you can check your answers when I play the tape recorder for the third time. Let’s begin.
Step V. Speaking
T: Look at the map on P65. And read the dialogue between Speaker A and B.
Then ask the students to make a similar asking-the-way dialogue in pairs
According to the map. ( After a while, the teacher asks some pairs to come to the front of the class and give their performances.)
Language points:
1. amusement
u.n 娱乐，消遣，兴趣 c. n 快乐的事，娱乐品，文娱活动
My chief amusement is fishing .
To our amusement, the teacher sang funny song in class
There are plenty of amusements here-cinemas, theatres, concerts and so on. (这里有许多娱乐项目，如电影、戏剧、音乐会等等。)
Games and sports should not be treated only as __________.
a. an amusement b. amusement c. amusements d. the amusement
补充： Amuse vt 使。。。发笑 / 逗。。。笑 amuse sb with sth
Amusing adj 令人发笑的，逗人笑 amused adj 感到可笑的
He often amuses us with humorous words.
What he said was so amusing.
We were amused by what he said.
(有同类用法的词在上一单元中已经介绍，这里就不罗嗦了)
2. theme一般指论文、演讲、音乐等的主题，也可指谈话等的题目、话 是正式用语
subject 是表达该含义的普通用词，用法范围较广
topic 指讲话、文章等的题目、话题或论题，（节、段）的主题，用法也较为广泛
Very few people can understand the theme of this kind of music
What’s the subject of this text?
Please find out the topic sentence in this passage.
3. attract vt 吸引、招引、引起、引诱
+ sb /sth / sb to sp
Bright colors attract children.
I tried to attract his attention, but failed .
What do you think attract so many visitors to the West Lake?
Attraction n 吸引、吸引力、吸引人的事物
The main attraction of the circus was a dancing bear .
4. get it在口语中用作不及物动词，可能表示“明白、理解”，“猜中”， 等义；
make it表示“及时到达”或“做成功某事”
catch it (因做错事而)挨骂、受责备、受罚、被打中
take it认为/ 假定/ 想象。。。
This is the whole story. Get it ? 这就是整个过程，明白吗？
You get it . 你猜中了。
I think we’ll just make it . 我认为我们会及时到达的。
It’s hard to make it to the top in show business .演艺行业要达到顶峰是
不容易的。
You’ll catch it if you’re not careful!你若不小心就会挨骂的。
He caught it right in the eye. 他的眼睛被打个正着
I take it that we are to discuss it with our head teacher. 我认为我们该。。
I can hardly take it that he could finish it in such a short time. 我几乎无法想象。。。
5. lead to 通向，通往/ 导致，招致
All the roads lead to Rome.
Hard work leads to success, while laziness leads to failure.
This street leads you to the station.
lead vt （1）引导，带领 They went out of the forest with a peacock leading the way .
（2）领导，率领 That general once led the Long March.
（3）使得，导致（某人做某事）What led you to believe it.
（4）（使）过某种生活 We are leading a busy life.
Lead by the nose 牵着鼻子走/ 完全控制某人
Lead off 开始/ 首先
Lead on 劝诱，哄（骗）
Lead up to 导致，打算（干什么）
Don’t let anybody lead you by the nose .
Who is going to lead off?
The salesman tried his best to lead people on to buy the goods.
What does he lead up to by doing this ?
Step VI. Summary and Homework
T: In this class, we’ve done some listening and speaking. We have also talked
About some equipments for pleasure in amusement park and practiced
Asking the way and giving directions, using the expressions on P66. After
Class, practise more dialogues about giving directions and preview the
Reading material “Theme Parks”. So much for today. Goodbye, everyone.
Blackboard Design
Unit 22The First Period Equipments for pleasure in the amusement park : roller coasters, racing cars, free for rides, bungee jumping, monorails, swings, shooting galleries, roundabouts, bumper cars and so on Language points : 1. amusement 2. got it ….
P.S. _________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
The Second and the third periods
Step I. Greetings
Step II. Lead-in
T: Yesterday we practiced giving directions and talked about some equipments for pleasure in an amusement park. Today we are going to read a passage. It is about some theme parks in the world. It will show you what you can do in each theme park. Do you know what is a theme park? Please read the text and the answer is just in it.
Questions for fast reading:
1. What is a theme park?
2. What theme parks are mentioned in the text?
(World Park, Ethnic Culture Park, Ocean Park, Disneyland, Universal studios )
Questions for scan reading.
1. How are the theme parks different from traditional amusement parks?
2. If I want to look at buildings, castles and statues from other countries,
Which theme park should I go? （头三道题答案均在第一段）
3. What can we see at the China Ethnic Culture Park?
4. Why do people go to the theme parks?（4。5。6。答案在第二段）
5. If I want to learn about life in the ocean, which theme park is best choice?
6. Where is Ocean Park? How many sections does it have? What are they?
What places can you go to at the lowland?
7. What’s the theme of Disneyland? What can meet in it ?
8. What’s the name of another big theme park in the US? At Universal, what are all the rides and activities based on?（7.8答案在第三段）
9. There are so many themes parks in the world. However, why new theme
Parks are still being built? What makes it possible for to experience almost anything without danger in these new theme parks? （最后一段）
The main idea for Each Paragraph.
Para1. The definition of theme park and introduction to some theme parks in China
Para2. Something about Ocean Park in Hong Kong
Para 3. Disneyland and the Universal Studios in US
Para 4. The reason why new theme parks are being built
Language points in the text.
1. unlike adj 不同的，相异的 The two flowers are quite unlike.
Prep 不像， 与。。。不同 Her baby is quite unlike her .
Unlikely adj 未必的， 不大可能的 She is unlikely to win the game .
不太真实可信的 That is an unlikely story.
Likely adj 很可能的 be likely to do= It is likely that…
2. teach sb sth （仅供参考）
A. + sb sth = + sth to sb
give , show , send , write, bring , offer, read , pass, lend ,
hand , tell , pay , throw, allow , wish , teach , promise , refuse etc
B. + sb sth = + sth for sb
make , buy , do , fetch, get, paint, save, etc
3. opportunity 强调是很恰当的机会
It’s a good opportunity for me to practise speaking English with them.
find/ make an opportunity of doing / to do…
have no/little / not much opportunity for doing / to do…
seize / miss an opportunity
take the opportunity of doing/ to do …(趁机会做某事)
chance 强调偶然性
Don’t give such a good chance to study abroad.
By chance 偶然地，意外地 I found that book by chance
Take a chance / take chances 冒险 They are taking chances.
By any chance 万一，碰巧If you, by any chance, come here , please tell me
Take one’s chance 碰运气，冒险 He went to California to take his chance .
4. divide / separate
separate 指把原来连在一起或靠近的“分隔”开来，也可指“离别，分手” 多与from连用；它还有形容词词性，意为“单独的，各自的”
divide 指把整体“划分”或“分割”成若干份，多与into, among 连用
它还有“除(尽)”的意思
A. The Pacific separates Asia from America.
Please separate the white shirts from the colored ones .
We separated at the railway station.
The babies are sleeping on separate beds.
B . The mother divided the watermelon into eight parts.
The students are divided into five groups
He divided the cake among the children.
Three divides nine. / Six divided by 2 is 3.
5. explore vt . 控测； 勘探/ 探究，仔细探查
explorer n 探测者； 探究者
exploration n 探测，探究， 探查
exploratory adj 探查的，探测的
Scientists will explore the Arctic regions.
6. Visitors can go on exciting rides where they can feel what it is like to do the
Things they have seen their heroes do in the movies.
7. If you want to know what it feels like to fall through the air, take off in a rocket, fly a helicopter or fight alien creatures in outer space, visit one of the theme parks in your area
以上两句由于句子成分复杂，最好做一下句子成分的划分
Blackboard Design
Theme parks Questions: 1. What is a theme park ? 2. What theme parks are mentioned in the text?Language points: 1. amusement 2. opputunity 3. divide 4. explore ……. …….. …….
P.S. ______________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________
The fourth period
Step I. Greetings
Step II. Revision
T: In the last period, we have learnt a passage about theme parks. Now let’s
Answer some questions. Please listen carefully.
1. Which park is China’s largest theme park ?
(The World Park )
2. What can you do at the World Park in China?
(We can look at buildings, castles and statues from more than 30 countries )
3. What’s the theme of the Disney parks ?
( The world of Walt Disney and his characters: Mickey Mouse, Donald Duck and many others )
4. Which section of the Ocean Park in Hong Kong should you go to if
You want to learn about the giant dinosaur’s footprints?
(At the Lowland.)
Step III. Grammar
T: Now, please look at the two sentences on the blackboard.
( Bb: He stood there. He read a newspaper. ) How can we join these two
sentences into one? Who can do it ?
S1: It can be joined like this : He stood there and read a read a newspaper.
(The teacher writes it on the blackboard. )
T: That’s right. Sit down, please. We can also say:
He stood there, reading a newspaper. (Write it on the blackboard and
Mark it with (1))
(Bb: First he graduated from the college. Then he went to a factory. )
Who can join them into one sentence?
S2: Let me try. After he graduated from the college, he went to a factory.
(The teacher writes it on the blackboard. )
T: You are right. We can also say: having graduated form the college, he went
To a factory. (Write the sentence on the blackboard and mark it with (2))
Now pay attention to these two sentences marked with (1) and (2). In the
Second sentence, there are two actions. One is “graduated from the
College”, and the other is “went to a factory”. Which happened first?
S3: The action “ graduated from the college” happened first.
T: Right. Now let’s look at the first sentence. There are also two actions
Which happened first?
S4: In this sentence, two actions happened at the same time.
T: Very good. Attention, please. When two things happen at the same time, or
Almost at the same time in one sentence, we often use the following structure:
v-ing (phrase ), main clause/ or main clause, v. –ing (phrase ) 板书
While one thing happens first , the other happens later, we usually use the
Following structure:
Having done, main clause/ or main clause, having done . 板书
Ss: Yes.
T: Now look at the three sentences in the box in Grammar on Page 55. Can you
Say something about the actions in them ?
T: Good. Now look at Exercise 1 and Exercise 2 in Grammar. Rewrite these sentences using the -ing form, paying attention to which action happens first.
(After several minutes, check the answers )
Step V. Summary and Homework
T: Today, we’ve done some exercises about the- ing form used as adverb. In
This part, you should pay attention to the time when things happened.
After class you should practise more to master them better. Don’t forget
To prepare for the Integrating skills. OK. That’s all for today. Class is
Over.
Blackboard Design
The fourth period He stood there. He read a newspaper. ----○He stood there and read a newspaper.○He stood there, reading a newspaper. First he graduated from the college. Then he went to a factory.○After he graduated from the college, he went to a factory.○Having graduated from the college, he went to a factory.……. ….. …….
P.S. ____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
The fifth period
Live to Ride （为飞车而活）
Step I. Greetings.
Step II. Lead- in
In the text “Theme parks” we know something about the famous theme parks
Both in china and in US . From it we know that a theme park is a collection
Of rides, exhibitions or other attractions that are based on a common theme.
This class let’s see more about rides in these parks. Please look at the part of
Integrating skills
Step III. Reading.
Questions
1. For many visitors, what are the theme parks all about?
2. What are the differences between today rides and the early days of roller coasters?
3. What is another attraction found in many theme parks?
(Thrill ride. 动感电影)
4． What the difference between thrill ride and the roller coasters? Give a
example.
5. Where can thrill rides send you ? and what can you feel in them?
6. What’s the limit to the fun ? ( the imagination of the designers of the
thrill rides. )
Language points.
1. ready adj (1) 有准备的，准备好的（for ,with ）只作表语
Supper is ready.
If she ready for the trip?
Are you ready with your work ?
(2) 甘心的，愿意的，情愿的，乐意的（to ）
I’m always ready to help you .
Are you ready to go with me to Beijing.
(3) 易于。。。的，动辄就。。。
Don’t be so ready to quarrel.
(4) 迅速的，立刻的，即时的（只作定语）
Pay him ready money.给他现钱
I bought a set of ready-made clothes. 我买了套成衣
Adv 事先准备好地 Alice doesn’t buy food ready cooked .
艾丽丝不买熟食
2. go through
（1） 经历，通过He once went through much hardship.
The deal didn’t go through.
（2） 仔细检查，全面考虑/ 审查
They went through our luggage at the customs .
Let’s go through the arguments again.
（3） 搜查 The policeman is going through the pockets of the
thief
（4） 做完某事 Let’s go through the exercises.
Go through with 把。。。进行到底
He is determined to go through with the invention.
3. Scream one’s way 一路尖叫着
Feel one’s way 措索着走
Fight one’s way 奋勇前进
Lose one’s way 迷路
Make one’s way 取道前进
Force one’s way 挤着向前走
Wind one’s way 蜿延前进，曲折前进
Get one’s way 实现了愿望
Have one’s way 随心所欲
Homework: Review the words and expressions in Unit 22.
Finish all the exercises in it.
Blackboard Design
The fifth period Live to ride Language points:1. be ready to do 2. go through 3.scream one’s way …… …………...
P. S. __________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________
篇16：Revision (Units 17-18)(人教版高一英语下册教案教学设计)
I. 汉英翻译
1、发生……，结果…… 6、占有，占领
2、在世界的另一端 7、查询，提出
3、对……乐观 8、庆祝教师节
4、身体健康 9、由…组成构成
5、自求之路 10、开始干某事
II单词拼写
1 .It was very (大方) of you to lend them your new car for their holiday.
2.T he man (威胁) the little girl with a knife.
3.He was (极度) angry at the news.
4.They set out for the (远征) to the south pole.
5.Afrer (毕业)，he took a job as a typist.
6.When he woke up, he found some people (包围)him.
7. (农业)has been playing an important role in our country. .
8.In the end , the city was taken (拥有)of by the Red Army.
9.Active (山水)may empty at any time.
10.There are a lot of (埋葬)grounds at the foot or middle of the hill.
III单项选择
1.It will be two months Jane leaves school.
What will of her ?
She is going to be a teacher.
A. when, happen B. before, become
C. after, take place D. since, instead
2. I saw her, I was struck by her beauty.
A.When the first time B.During the first time
C.For the first time D.The first time
3.I was having my supper he called on me without any appointment made me unhappy.
A.before, as B.while, it C.as, that D.when, which
4.It was dark; we decided to for the nigt at a farmhouse.
A.put away B.put dowm C.put up D.put out
5.Hard work success while failure laziness.
A. leads up; lies to B. leads to; lies in
C. leads on; lies of D. lead down; lies by
6.I can guess you were in a hurry, you your sweater inside out.
A.would wear B.wore C.had worn D.are wearing
7.I had an accident a car and I was woozy hitting the car door.
A.of; by B.with; by C.with; from D.on; from
8.Mary, I didn’t recognize you at the party.
I my hair and sunglasses.
A.have cut ; wear B. had cut; was wearing
C.cut; put on D.was cuttimg; was putting on
9.Life for women seems men ,due to the tradition and the society.
A. twice difficult as B. as difficult as
C. twice as difficult as D. twice as difficult than
10.I can’t get the book on the top shelf, for it is my reach.
A. within B.beyond C.out D.from
11.Huang shan is famous its landscape and known a place of interest the world.
A.for; as ; to B.with;for; by C.to; for; wifh D.by; as; for
12.Girls one third of the total student population in our school, which 5678 students.
A.make of; is made up B.make up ; is made up of
C.make from; make up D.made into ;make up of
13.China has a population of 1.3 billion, _____are Han Nationality.
A. most of it B.two thirds of whom
C.70% of which D.mainly of them
14._____of the city lies a lake.
A.To east B.In east C.On east D.East
IV.课文填词
1.It has often been_____that life is difficult as it is.
2.What has______her?
3.On November 12th the storm died______.
4.I couldn’t ______my left leg and my head was woozy from hitting the ground.
5.I did so______regret.
6.He lives in a town ______the east coast.
7.Hainan Island is ______the south of Guangdong province.
8.Henan province lies _____central china.
9.The ship hit a rock _____the west coast of the pacific.
The Key
I :
1.to become of 2.at the opposite end of the world
3.to be oppotimistic about 4.to be in good health
5.the way of self rescue 6.to take possession of
7.to refer fo 8.to celebrate Teachers’ day
9.to be made up of 10.turn to doing something
II
1.generous 2.threatened 3.extremely 4.expedition 5.graduation 6.surrounding 7.Agriculture 8.possession 9.volcanoes 10.burial
III
1--5BDDCB 6-10 DCBCB 11---14ACBD
IV:
1.said 2.become of 3.dowm 4.stand on 5.without 6.on 7.on 8.in 9.off
篇17：The Revision of Units 19-22(人教版高一英语下册教案教学设计)
The First Period
Ⅰ. 汉英翻译：
1. 对．．．有影响 have an effect on
2. 违背自然 go against nature
3. 作．．．笔记 take notes of
4. 尽可能充分利用时间 make as much use of time as possible
5. 引进 bring in
6. 记得某事 have ... in mind
7. 扮演角色 act the role of
8. 哄堂大笑 roar with laughter
9. 使用双关语 play on words
10. （与某某）有共同之处 have in common with
11. 说实话 tell the truth
12. 从一种文化到另一种文化 from culture to culture
13. 直视某人的眼睛 look into one's eyes
14. 成圆形状 in a circle
15. 昂起头来 hold up one's head
16. 沿路直走 go straight down this road
17. 共同的 in common
18. 以．．．为基础 be based on
19. 精力集中于 focus on
20. 在海底行走 walk on the ocean floor
Ⅱ. 单词拼写:
1. Advanced techniques / technology (技术) have been used to increase the produce.
2. The shortage / lack (缺乏) of water reminds people to save water.
3. He has been into gardening (园艺) since childhood.
4. I'm fond of the golden (金色) sun rays at sunset.
5. He is short of practical (实际) experience.
6. The Chinese Revolution has been divided into several stages (时期) .
7. The actual (实际) cost was much higher than we had expected.
8. We take this opportunity of expreessing our sincere appreciation (感激) of your help.
9. The whole ceremony took place silently (寂静无声) .
10. They went to an amusement (娱乐) park last Sunday.
11. This is a confusing (难以理解的) word because it had two meanings.
12. A drunk man drove a truck crazily (疯狂的) in the street and resulted in a serious accident.
13. He bent (弯腰) forward to hear what the child said.
14. I'm very sorry that this has occurred (发生) to you.
15. The attraction (引力) of the moon for the earth causes the tides.
16. The old temple was delivered in sections (部分) and assembled on the site.
17. With just a little imagination (想象) you could turn this place into a palace.
18. A minority (少数) of the children wanted to dance, but the majority chose a picnic.
19. There was a quarrel about dividing (分开) the stolen goods.
20. He explained all the details (细节) to us.
Ⅲ. 句型转换：
1. Although China is a big country, only 7% of the land can be used for farming.
Big as China is, only 7% of the land can be used for farming.
2. Speak English where it is possible.
Speak English where possible.
3. Future agriculture should depend not only on traditional methods but also on high technology.
Future agriculture should depend on high technology as well as traditional methods.
4. More latest technical information was introduced from abroad.
More latest technical information was brought in from abroad.
5. Jia Sixie, who lived in the sixth century, wrote a book called Qi Min Yao Shu.
Jia Sixie, living in the sixth century, wrote a book which was called Qi Min Yao Shu.
6. Their clothes, make-up and the way they walk make people laugh.
It is their clothes, make-up and the way they walk that make people laugh.
7. Dating from the Qin Dynasty, the traditional crosstalk shows have made people all over China roar with laughter.
Dating back to the Qin Dynasty, the traditional crosstalk shows have made people all over China roar with laughter.
8. Their talk includes not only tongue twisters but also rhythm and rhythming words.
Their talk includes rhythm and rhyming words as well as tongue twisters.
9. I came with the intention of staying, but now I have decided to leave.
I intended to come here to stay, but now I have decided to leave.
10. I decided to consider the whole matter to be a great joke.
I decided to look on the whoke matter as a great joke.
11. Just like spoken language, body language is not the same in different cultures.
Just like spoken language, body language varies from culture to culture.
12. In some countries, for example, France and Russia, a visiting friend is greeted with a kiss on the cheek.
In some countries, such as France and Russia, a visiting friend is welcomed with a kiss on the cheek.
13. A smile can be helpful for us to pass the difficult situations and find friends in a world of strangers.
A smile can help us get though difficult situations and find friends in a world of strangers.
14. If we are feeling sad, it's the best to see the smiling face of a good friend.
If we are feeling down or lonely , there is nothing better than to see the smiling face of a good friend.
15. After visitors enjoyed the rides at the headland, they could take the shuttle to the lowland.
Having enjoyed the rides at the headland, visitors could take the shuttle to the lowland.
16. Visitors can go on exciting rides at the place where they can feel what is like to do things.
Visitors can go on exciting rides where they can feel what is like to do things.
17. You sit in a car that “falls” from a tall tower, and you scream your way down to a safe landing.
Screaming your way down to a safe landing, you sit in a car that “falls” from a tall tower.
18. The movie is made according to a real-life incident.
The movie is based on a real-life incident.
19. Your ideas should include all kinds of attractions and activities.
Your ideas should include a variety of attractions and activities.
20. Even the guestures we use for “yes” and “no ” are different around the world.
Even the guestures we use for “yes” and “no” are not the same all over the world.
The Second Period
单项选择：
1. She's look ______ the leading actress in the film.
A. out into B. for as C. on as D. out of [ C ]
2. Tigers, which were considered to be ______ to man, now are on the list of endangered animals.
A. a danger B. danger C. dangers D. endangered [ A ]
3. He ______ the children for hours with his stories and jokes..
A. made B. amuse C. delight D. entertained [ D ]
4. My interest in stamp collecting ______ my school days.
A. dated back to B. dates to C. dates on D. dates from [ D ]
5. The fire ______ at might was still seen ______ the next morning.
A. breaking out; burning
B. to breal out; to burn
C. broke out; burnt
D. had broken out; burning [ A ]
6. I didn't ______ the importance of English ______ I decided to have that job interview.
A. know; unless B. realize; until
C. see; when D. notice; while [ B ]
7. The picture ______ on the wall is painted by my nephew.
A. having hung B. hanging C. hangs D. hanged [ B ]
8. Shanghai is ______ the base of China's industry.
A. well-known B. well-known as C. famous D. famous for [ B ]
9. I remember the many times she tried to spell words into my small hand. At last she ______ my understanding.
A. made B. got C. took D. reached [ D ]
10. We ______ each other all the best in the new year.
A. hoped B. wanted C. wished D. expected [ C ]
11. At present some children ________ their parents for whatever they need.
A. ask about B. bring into C. depend on D. reach for [ C ]
12. It was in the room ______ Lu xun was born ______ we had the conference.
A. where, where B. that, that
C. that, where D. where, that [ D ]
13. As much use of time as possible has been made ______ his study.
A. to further B. of furthering
C. of to further D. to furthering [ A ]
14. The old man is still in danger. He is ______ he was yesterday.
A. as well as B. not worse than
C. no better than D. more worse than [ C ]
15. This hall will ______ 3000 people.
A. include B. sit C. hold D. take [ C ]
16. The temperature in greenhouses will be controlled with computers, ______ the weather is like outside.
A. however B. whatever C. no matter how D. what [ B ]
17. Since vegetables are ______ from the wind, rain and insects, they can grow without danger _____ diseases.
A. kept, by B. prevented, of
C. protecting, in D. in proptected, from [ D ]
18. The police ______ the room for finger prints.
A. checked B. tested C. left D. tried [ C ]
19. Can you ______ what life would be like without electricity for a week?
A. think B. imagine C. suppose D. dream [ B ]
20. I didn't follow the ________ printed on the box, and broke the machine.
A. message B. information C. notes D. instructions [ D ]
21. ________ two years to looking after her sick father, she badly needed a holiday.
A. Having devoted B.Devoted
C. To be devoted D. Having been devoted [A]
22. By the end of last year , another new gymnasium ________ in Beijing.
A. would be completed B. was being completed
C. has been completed D. had been completed [ D ]
23. Unless ______ to speak, you should remain silent at the conference.
A. invited B. inviting C. was invited D. has invited [A]
24. There's a ______ to one's capacity, so one should not make oneself overtired.
A. relaxation B. contribution C. hesitation D. limitation [D]
25. Your desk is crowded with too many unnecessary things, you have to ______ some of them.
A. remain B. resist C. remove D. renew [C]
26. Social ______ vary greatly from country to country. Remember, “When in Rome, do as the Romans do.”
A. customs B. manners C. habits D. practices [A]
27. You should seize the ______ . It may never come again. [C]
A. lunch B. tip C. opportunity D. information
28. Women were not allowed ______ in the okd Olympics, ____ began around the year 776BC. [ D ]
A. join; it B. to join; that
C. joining; which D. to join; which
29. You should ______ your attention on what your teacher is saying.
A. pay B. draw C. take D. focus [D]
30. Complete the following sentences. What you write must be _____ what you hear. [ B ]
A. basing B. based on C. is based on D. base on
31. It suddenly _____ him that he was not allowed to go there.
A. occurred B. happened C. hit D. got [ C ]
32. ______ , I don't agree with him. [ B ]
A. Telling the truth
B. To tell the truth
C. Tell you the truth
D. To tell truth
33. He is now ____ different John Smith from ______ he was three years ago. [ A ]
A. a; what B. the; the C. a; that D. the; what
34. ---What has made him so unhappy?
--- ________ the ticket for the football match. [ D ]
A. Having been lost B. Being lost
C. Because of losing D.Losing
35. ---I must apologize for ______ ahead of time.
---That's all right. [ B ]
A. letting you not know B. not letting you know
C. letting you know not D. letting not you know
36. He didn't mind ______ TV while he was working on his novel.
A. they watching B. they watch
C. them to watch D. their watching [ D ]
37. The line is busy. I can't ______ although I've tried several times.
A. go through B. get through C. hear from D. ring up [B]
38. That old building was ______ in order that they could build a new apartment house. [ C ]
A. tearing down B. broke down
C. torn down D. breaking down
39. You are lucky to have avoided _______ .
A. to be punished B. punishing
C. punish D. being -punished [D ]
40. Miss Chen's bad habit is ______ without thorough understanding.
A. reads B. reading C. being read D. read [B]
The Third Period
Fill in the blanks according to the contents of units 19-22.
1. How are people's eating habits changing over the years?
2. It was from the early 1990s that the scientists started to develop new techniques to increase agricultural production without harming the environment.
3. Chemical fertilisation, for example, helps to produce better crops, but is harmful to the enviroment.
4. Future agriculture should depend on high technology as well as traditional methods.
5. The biggest problem of Chinese farmers is the shortage of arable land.
6. Today, many vegetables are not grown in gardens but in greenhouses where they are protected from the wind, rain and insects.
7. In the past there were no trees left in or around the village.
8. To the villager's great joy, the tree and tea crops are also bringing in money to them.
9. Jia Sixie's book is a practical guide to farming.
10. After about three years, her work planting trees had turned barren land green again.
11. I would like to reach a wide audience, though I mostly have adults in mind .
12. My next show will have a part in which I act the role of a scientist, the way that a scientist walks and talks.
13. The actors make us laugh by making fun of somebody's way of dressing or telling an amusing story.
14. What comedians have in common with the player in a comedy is their way of playing with words.
15. Dating back to the Qin Dynasty, the traditional crosstalk shows , or xiangshaeng shows, have made people all over China roar with laughter for centuries.
16. If you are not fluent in Chinese, you will not catch all of it.
17. I could hear the newly-married couple quarrelling every day over small matters.
18. Learning to speak a foreign language enriches one's life.
19. A yellow car passed me and suddenly cut in right in front of me, as there was another car coming in the other direction.
20. We looked at each other for a moment in great surprise and total silence.
21. You are late for a flight and you want to go ahead of the queue.
22. Making eye contact- looking directly into someone's eyes - is in some countries a way to show interest.
23. A smile can help us get through difficult situations and find friends in a world of strangers.
24. A smile can open doors and tear down walls.
25. We can smile at ourselves in the mirror to make ourselves feel happier and stronger.
26. Moving the index finger forwards and backwards.
27. I feel like taking a rest. Would you mind my sitting down for a while.
28. When I got home, I found it in a total mass. It took me hours to put my house inorder.
29. The tail will stand straight out from the body..
30. To show friendship, elephants will touch each other with their trunks and stand close to each other, putting their foreheads together.
31. Straight down, then left, across the bridge, walk past the free fall ride and it will be on my left.
32. A theme park is a collection of rides, exhibitions and other attractions that are based on a common theme.
33. What they all have in common is that they combine fun with the opportunity to learn something.
34. The park is divided into two sections.
35. Having enjoyed the rides at the Headland, visitors can take the shattle to the lowlanfd.
36. He cut off the electricity quickly and prevented an accident.
37. The journey begins at the beach and continues down to the bottom of the sea.
38. If you stand at the top of the tower, you get a wonderful view of the coast and the sea.
39. Disney land in Califorria was one of the first theme parks to become popular around the world.
40. What do people do at theme parks, besides looking at exhibitions?
篇18：Unit 13-17 复习教案(人教版高一英语下册教案教学设计)
Subject: English Grade One, Class Six Class Time :Monday, August 23,
Revision(Unit13-17)
------- Focusing on the key phrases and structures
Teaching goals
1. Help students strengthen what they have learnt in the past half term
2. Make them relaxed fully in order that they can deal with the coming exam at their best.
3. Make them have a further understanding about some key structures.
Teaching important points
1.How to motivate our students when they are playing the games
2.How to help them to keep the key phrases and structures by heart efficiently.
Teaching difficult points
1. How to keep the activities well organized and how to clarify some complicated structures.
2. How to give the instructions simply and clearly
Class Type
I am making for a new way to review language knowledge more efficiently
Teaching methods
1. Communicative teaching methods
2. Integrate competitions into the process of reviewing
3. Group work.
4. Induce students to analyze some key structures
5. Strengthen the teaching effects by giving them great encouragement.
Teaching aids
Papers, blackboard, slide projector
Homework
Prepare themselves for the coming examination
Summary after Class
The goals made before class have been reached quite well. The students took part in the games actively. They are quite pleased to accept this way of teaching.. However, the amount of knowledge they have really learnt by heart is a little less than we have anticipated beforehand . So we have to admit the fact that it is rather difficult to combine the communicative teaching ways with the current teaching conditions, in which we have such a large class including fifty-six students or so and the great pressure coming from the miscellaneous examinations.
Teaching procedure
Step 1 A competition for key phrases(10 minutes)
T: Good morning, boys and girls .Have you prepared well for the coming exam? Do you feel a little nervous about that ? Now let’s relax ourselves together. We will have a competition. We have four unknown slides. They are slide A, slide B, slide C, and slide D. Each slide has six phrases in Chinese on itself. In our class we have four groups. Every group can get a slide by drawing lots(抽签).In the end , we will see which group can translate all of these phrases into English correctly., Ok , now every group will send a student out to choose your slide.
Group 4 : (A)junk food, ought to , plenty of , keep up with , make a choice, now and then
Group 1: (B)dress up, in one’s opinion, play a joke on sb., take in, call on, bring back
Group 3: (C)pay off, at most, act out, a great deal of , a number of , pick out
Group 2: (D)around the corner, come to terms with, die down, day and night, take possession of, make up
T: Good job. You have finished it very well except for only one mistake. Group 3 have mixed up two phrases.
We should pay attention to the answer to NO.4 in the slide C, The right answer should be ”a number of”. And the answer to NO.5 in the slide C should be “a great deal of ”. Let’ look at another slide.
T: Group1, Group2, Group4 each have got 10 points. Congratulations! Group 3 has got 5 points. Try harder, guys.
Step 2 Design a form about those modal verbs which are used to express possibility.(18minutes)
T: Our competition will continue. We have learnt that “must , can/could, may/might “can be used to express possibility.
Can you try designing a form to make it clear how to use them in different sentence styles and different tenses. Group members should work together to get the best one in your group. Give you ten minutes to prepare for it.
T: Ok, the time is up. You can’t change it any more. Different groups can exchange your forms, and let’ s compare them with each other. Oh, which do you think is the best one?
Ss: We have agreed on the form made by group 3 .
T: Let’s have a look at it with the projector.
Modal verbs to Tenses
express guess or possibility Present
Or
Future
Present continuous Past
Or
perfect
Positive
sentences must:: very sure, certain
may
might perhaps, maybe
could possible
Modal
verb
+do/be
Modal verb
+be doing
Modal verb
+have done
Negative
sentences Can’t very sure
Couldn’t it is impossible
May not perhaps
Might not not
Question
sentences
Can/could
T: Well done. Your group deserve another ten points and the other three groups each have got five points
Pay attention to two points: (1)“mustn’t” means “You shouldn’t do it”, or “you are forbidden to do something.”. If you want to express you are sure that something is impossible, you should use “ can’t or couldn’t” to say that.(2)Look at the following examples.
a. He must be a student, isn’t he?
b. He must have finished it, hasn’t he?
c. He must have done it yesterday, didn’t he?
If we write the first part of each sentence without “must”, we’ll get three sentences like these.
a’. He is a student b’. He has finished it. c. He did it yesterday.
We got the second part of a, b, c from the sentences a’,b’,c’. Actually, we don’t try to guess any more in the second part of Sentence a, b, c.
Step 3 A game named “single or plural”(15mintues)
T: The following game is still played among groups. The knowledge you will use in this game is Subject-verb agreement.
T:(facing the group 1) Let’ s take Group 1 as an example. I have some phrases for your group members which can be used as subjects. As soon as I tell you one, you should tell me whether its predicate verb is single or plural. I will tell you my phrases one by one and you guys give me your answers one by one. You must do it as quickly as possible because you have only three minutes. Within three minutes, the group who has got the most correct answers is the winner Let’s have a try.
T: physics
S1: single
T: a library together with books
S2: single
T: not only the teacher but also the students
S: plural
… … …
… … …
T: Do you know the rule of the game , S10? Can you tell us something about it?
S10: Yes.I think every student has a chance to take part in the game. It’s very exciting.
T: Quite right. Remember only your first answer makes sense. Anyone can not answer it twice in the same round.
T: When one student is telling his answer, others should keep quiet. Let’ s start our game from group 4.
(maths, the number of students , a number of students, everything, both A and B, half of the food, half of the students, fifty percent of the population, ten pounds, works, every possible means , a clerk and secretary, every boy and every girl, more than one , many a , the pair of glasses, the glasses, bread and butter, the United States, cattle …)
T: Ok, the game is over. Group1 has got 15 points ,.Group 2 has gained 17 points. Group 3 has got 21points. Group 4 has scored 14 points.
Step 4 Summary(1minutes)
Let’s look at our score board
Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4
30 32 36 29
T: Congratulations. Group 3 win the game at last.
Step 2 Homework(1minutes)
I will assign you nothing for homework. Just remember to prepare yourself for the coming examination. Keep yourself in a high spirit and never forget to relax yourself now and then.
篇19：高一下学期全册教案(人教版高一英语下册教案教学设计)
Unit 13 Healthy eating
Teaching Aims and Demands
1.Words and Phrases
Four Skills: stomach fever ought to examine plenty of diet keep up with make a right choice short of fit gain now and then.
2.train the students’ listening ability.
3.develp the students’ speaking ability by describing, talking and discussion.
Three Skills:
energy soft bar fuel chemical balance tasty boil mixture
Spoken English:
In the clinic / seeing a doctor:
What’s wrong with you? What’s the matter with you?
Lie down and let me examine you.
Let me have a look.
Where does it hurt?
Drink plenty of water and get some rest.
I’ve got a pain here. This place hurts.
There’s something wrong with back/my knee/my arm.
I don’t feel well.
Grammar:
Use of Language:
1. Master the function use of language as defined above.
2. Help the students to finish the tasks of listening, reading, writing, speaking presented in the book and the exercise book through using what the students have learned.
Learn the text about healthy eating. Get the students know about the basic knowledge of how to eat healthily.
Important points:
1. Talk about different kinds of food that one favorite.
2. Learn the basic knowledge of healthy eating.
3. Learn how to say in the clinic.
4. Grasp the language points and grammar in the text.
Difficult points: The use of modal verbs --- had better, should and ought to.
Teaching aids: computer or slider-projector
Way of Teaching: Communication way of teaching, discussion and group work.
PERIOD 1
Teaching aims and demands
1. Aims of knowledge:
Learn and master the phrases
2. Ability aims:
1. Train the students’ listening ability.
2. Develop the students’ speaking ability by describing, talking and discussion.
3.Moral aims:
Teaching important point:
1. Train the students’ listening ability.
2. Master the new phrase, sentence patterns and everyday English and make the students be free to talk about their favourite food and give reasons for their decisions.
Teaching difficult point:
1. How to improve the students’ listening ability.
2. How to finish the task of speaking.
Teaching methods:
1. Listening and answering activity to help the students go though will the listening material.
2. Individual, pair or group work to make every student work in class.
Teaching steps:
Step 1 Warming-Up
First show the students some pictures of dishes and so to introduce the topic of this unit.
And then show the pictures on their textbooks and let them to decide what is junk food and what is not.
Here the students may have a short ask and answer in pairs to themselves more engaged in the topic.
Step 2 Listening
Let the students listen to the tape and be prepared to answer the questions below.
Step 3 Speaking
Show the students the three situations as on P2. Then ask the students to prepare a dialogue according to the examples in pairs. Ask several pairs of students to present their dialogue
After that list the useful expressions in their dialogue.
Language points:
1. Does Mike have a fever?
fever
发烧,发热;热度;狂热,高度兴奋
He had a slight fever. 他有点发烧。
Everyone was in a fever of excitement. 所有的人都兴奋之极。
Feverish a.1. 发热的,发烧的 2.狂热的,兴奋的
You're a bit feverish, you should go to bed. 你有点发烧,你该上床去。
They worked with feverish haste to finish the job.
为了完成此事他们以狂热的速度工作着。
2.My left arm is broken. It really hurts.
hurt
vt.1. 使受伤 2. 使疼痛 3. 伤...的感情;使(感情)受到伤害 4. 损害,危害
vi.1. 疼痛n.1. (精神上的)创伤 2. 伤;痛
No one was seriously hurt in the traffic accident.
在这次交通事故中没有人受重伤。
The tight shoe hurt my foot. 这只鞋太紧,把我的脚挤疼了。
He inadvertently hurt her feelings. 他无意中伤了她的感情。
The scandal hurt the government's image badly.
这丑闻严重损害了政府的形象。
My right leg hurts. 我右脚疼。
It was a real hurt to her vanity. 这对她的虚荣心真是一个打击。
The massage made the hurt go away. 按摩使疼痛消失了。
3. ---What's the matter?---I have a pain here.
Ask the patient what is wrong and give him some advice.
What's the matter 怎么啦？有什么毛病？
pain
n.1. 疼痛;痛苦 2.辛苦,努力[-s]
vt.1. 使烦恼, 使痛苦 2. 使疼痛
vi.1. 引起疼痛, 感到疼痛
The death of her son gave her infinite pain. 她儿子的去世使她悲痛欲绝。
She has a pain in her stomach. 她胃痛。
No pains, no gains. 不劳则无获。
It pained me to see my child suffer like that.
看到我的孩子受这样的罪,我心里非常难过。
My arm is paining. 我手臂疼痛。
4.Was the peach ripe or green? You ought to be careful with fruit.
ought to
1.应当,应该 2. (表示可能性、期望)该
Students ought to study hard.
学生应该努力用功。
You ought to read his novels.
你应该读读他的小说。
It ought to be a fine day tomorrow.
明天该是好天气。
careful
a.1. 仔细的;\小心的
2. [(+of/about/with)][+to-v][+v-ing][+Wh-][+(that)]
John was careful not to say anything about this to her.
约翰小心翼翼,避免向她提及此事。
Be careful with the dynamite.
当心这炸药。
A good writer is careful about details.
凡是优秀作家都重视细节的描写。
I am always careful when crossing a street.
我过马路时总是很小心的。
5.You'd better get some rest.
had better
(劝告、建议说)最好做某事;比较有用的办法是...
否定、疑问、反意问句的使用.
6.I advise you not to eat fruit that isn't ripe in the future.
advise
vt. 劝告,忠告[(+sb+todo)][+doing][+that+(should)do]
We advised her that she (should) wait.
我们劝她等。
We advised him not to act in haste.
我们劝他不要匆忙行事
7.Lie down and let me examine you.
examine
vt.1. 检查;细查;诊察 2. 审问;盘问[(+on)] 3. 测验[(+in/on)]
The doctor examined the boy and found there was nothing the
matter with him.
医生检查了男孩的身体发现他是健康的。
The lawyer examined the witness.
律师讯问了证人。
The teacher examined the students in physics.
教师考学生物理。
8.Drink plenty of water and get some rest.
plenty
n.丰富;充足;大量[(+of)]
He has plenty of humorous stories to tell.
他有许多幽默故事可讲。
Holmes and he had plenty in common.
他与福尔摩斯有许多共同之处。
Step 4 Homework
In this class we’ve done some listening and that food we eat is healthy food and which food is junk food .Of course we’ve also learned some useful phrase .I hope you can master them after class preview the reading material “we are what we eat”. So much for today. Goodbye, everyone.
Prepare for the next class.
Collect some menus if possible for the next class.
The design of the writing on the blackboard
Unit 13 healthy eating
The first period
All the time, have a fever, be careful .in the future, advise sb. To do sth.
PERIOD 2
1.Aims of knowledge:
Learn and master the phrases
2.Ability aims:
1．Train the student’s reading ability.
2．Develop the students’ speaking ability by describing, talking and discussion.
3. Moral aims:
Enable the students to understand the best way to make sure that we will fell and look fine is to develop healthy eating habits by learning the reading text.
Teaching important points:
1. Improve the student’s reading ability.
2. Master the following phrase: keep up with, too much, make choices, be harmful to, lose weight, be prepared for.
Teaching difficult points:
How to make the students understand the reading material better and answer some questions on the passage.
Teaching steps:
Step 1 Introduction
Yesterday we learned something about food. And we’ve3 known what food we eat is healthy food and what food is junk food. Who can give us an example? You try, please.
Using the questions on P3 to introduce the new text.
Step 2 Fast-reading
1.What does the “fuel ” mean in the first paragraph?
(It means different kinds of materials, such as protein, Calcium that we need to keep healthy.)
2.What do we have to consider when we choose to buy or eat?
(What kinds of nutrients that the foods contain.)
3.What made our eating habit changing?
(Many things: what people believe, advice from companies and stores.)
4. How can we feel and look fine?
(We ought to learn about our body and the fuel it needs to keep fit.)
Explain the language points if necessary.
Step 3 Carefully-reading
How many parts can be divided into?
(Three parts.)
What’s the main idea of each part?
(1.our eating habits are changing. 2.why the eating habits are changing 3.the best way to develop healthy eating habits.)
Step 4 Talking
Ask the students to take out their menus and read them carefully. Then prepare a dialogue that may happen between a customer and a waiter/waitress.
Step 5 Homework
PERIOD 3
Language points
1.Our eating habits have changed, as has our way of life.
as+倒装句
...也一样,即...and our way of life too.
2.If we want to keep up with the high pace of modern life, we’d better
make the right choices about what and how we eat.
keep up with
1. 跟上 2. 和...保持联系
They walked so fast that I could not keep up with them.
他们走得那么快,我没法跟上。
She has kept up with some of her friends since her retirement.
她退休后一直同一些朋友保持着联系。
3.Some nutrients help build our body and make it stronger.
build
vt.1. 建筑; 造 2. 建立;发展;增进[(+up)]
4.Fish, meat and beans contain a lot of protein.
contain
5.Other nutrients help keep our body functioning well.
function
n.[C] 1. 功能,作用 2. 职务,职责
vi.1. (机器等)工作,运行 2. 起作用[(+as)]
The teacher did not explain its grammatical function.
老师没有解释它的语法功能。
What is his function on the committee?
他在委员会里担任什么职务?
The refrigerator is not functioning well.
冰箱有点问题。
The sofa functions as a bed at night.
这沙发在夜里可以当床。
6.Vitamins help our body fight disease.
fight
vt.1. 与...作战;与...斗争
fight with 和...斗争;fight for 为争取...而斗争
7.But the choice we make are not just about nutrition..
not just
同not only
8.Many people make their choices about eating habits based on
what they believe.
based on
9.Organic vegetables are those that are grown without chemicals that
can be harmful to human beings or the environment.
chemical
a.1. 化学的, 化学上的,化学用的 n.1. 化学制品;化学药品[C]
He devoted his life to chemical research.
他一生从事化学研究。
He is experimenting with a new chemical.
他正在实验一种新的化学制品。
be harmful to
对什么有害(also 'do harm to')
Smoking is harmful to health.
吸烟有害健康。
10.Because we have so much to choose from, many companies offer advice about what we eat.
to choose from
11.It is probably better if we spend our time and money on buying keeping a balanced diet.
probably
ad. 大概,或许,很可能（比可能性大，而且常有一定依据）
He will probably refuse the offer.
他很可能会拒绝这一提议。
spend
spend...(in)doing; spend...(on)doing; spend...on/for sth
12.The same goes for 'crash diets' that some companies say they will make us lose weight fast.
go for
适合于；对...适用
What he said about you goes for me too.
他关于你的一席话对我也适用。
lose weight
体重减轻
I think she might have lost a bit of weight.
我想她体重可能减轻了一些。
长胖 put on weight; gain weight
13.We ought to learn more about our body and the fuel it needs to keep fit.
fit
此处：健康的;强健的
You look very fit, Mike.
麦克,你看上去很健康。
14.Only in this way will we be ready for the challenges and opportunities in life.
Only in this way will we...
only+状语放在句子开头要引起主句倒装
Only when you grow up will you understand the importance of learning.
Only then could he thought of me.
15.Sugar is bad for your teeth and can make you gain weight.
be bad for
对什么有害
be bad for 对什么有好处
be good/bad to 对某人好/不好
18.You have a bit of a fever.
a bit
有点
在修饰名词时要加of
Period 4
Teaching aims:
1.aims of knowledge:
1. Review the words learned in the last two periods.
2. Learn and master modal verbs:
had better, should, ought to
3.Ability aims:
1.How to guess the missing word according to the given sentence.
2. Let the students learn how to give advice or opinion about something, especially master how to use “should, ought to, had better and their negative forms” to give advice.
Teaching important points:
1. How to guess the missing word according to the given sentence.
2. Let the students learn how to give advice or opinion about something, especially master how to use “should, ought to, had better and their negative forms” to give advice.
Teaching difficult points
How to correctly use “should, ought to, had better and their negative forms” to give advice.
Teaching procedures:
Step 1 Revision
Check the homework.
Step 2 Grammars
First present the students the modal sentences with Modal Verbs and ask the students to make some sentences with them.
Step 3 Consolidation
(1) Finish the exercise on P5 and on P74
(2)Take out a piece of paper with the column “Ask ###” in order to make the students understand when you are giving advice it is better to use some sentences with had better (not), and ought (not) to, should (not). Then read a passage as an example and afterwards list the points you have to pay attention to when you give advice.
1.give advice that will really help the person.
2. be polite and sincere
at last get the students to finish the following practice.
Step 4 Homework
Finish the exercise 3 on P74 in the students’ workbook.
PERIOD 5
Teaching aims;
1. Aims of knowledge:
1>Review the useful expressions learnt in this unit by making sentences with them.
2>Review how to use some Modal verbs to give advice or opinion about something.
2.Ability aims:
Let students know how to write recopies for their favourite dishes by reading “SNACKS” and two examples of recipes.
Teaching important points:
1. How to master Modal verbs
-had better, should, ought to
2. How to let the students understand the text “SNACKS” better and learn to write a recipe.
Teaching difficult point:
How to improve the students’ integrating skills.
Teaching procedures:
Step 1 Revision
Let some students read their reply to the letters on P74.
Step 2 Pre –reading and Reading
As we all know, people have to have food in order to live in our country, corn and wheat are the main crops in the north, while rice is the main food in the south. In western countries, bread is very important. Bread to western is just like rice to Chinese in the south. It is westerners’ most widely eaten food and is often called “the staff of life”. But in actual life, sancks are3 also very important for Chinese and foreigners. Do you often eat snacks?
Read the text on P6 and then get the students to find the main idea of it (Snacks is also important. we need to learn something about snacks and the way to prepare it.)
Language points:
1. Even if we choose nutritious food for our main meals, we probably still need to refuel now and then.
Even if
同even though，即使；尽管
now and then
同a little now and a little then; every now and then，有时候
2. Most fruits are naturally sweet and we can eat them just the way they are.
just the way thay are
意同in the way that they are
3.There are many recipes for simple and healthy snacks that taste great
and keep us going.
taste
Step 3 Writing
Ask the students to work in pairs to write the recipe for their favourite dish.
We may first give the tips on P7 as a guide.
Step 4 Discussions
First ask the students to read the passage on P75 and then give the following questions as the topic for the students to talk: What is a couch potato?
What does one have to pay special attention to in order to keep healthy? (food and exercise etc.)
Step 5 Homework
Do a general survey in order to learn about the differences between people’s eating habits and try to find which is healthier.
RECORD AFTER TEACHING
4>workbook
1>May I take your order, please?
take your order
[用法]餐馆常用语，order：叫(菜或饮料)
2>What do you recommend?
recommend
[用法]vt.1. 推荐,介绍[(+as/for)]
Can you recommend me some new books on this subject?
你能推荐一些有关这个学科的新书给我吗?
3>A hamburger is a dish while the others are not.
while
[用法]而，强调对比关系
4>You should avoid eating vegetables that are grown with too many chemicals.
avoid
[用法]避免，后接ing形式
5>You must pass your driving test next time you take it.
next time
[用法]连词用法
6>There is a species of inactive people, namely the 'mouse potato.'
namely
[用法]ad. 即,那就是
[举例]Only one person can answer the question namely you.
只有一个人能回答这个问题,那就是你。
7>The best source for calories is carbohydrates.
source
[用法]n.[C]1. (河的)源头;水源 2. 根源;来源 3. 提供消息(或证据)者;消息(或证据)来源 4. 出处;原始资料
[举例]Do you know the source of Amazon River?
你知道亚马逊河的源头吗?
They are required to publish the sources of their campaign funds.
他们必须公布自己竞选经费的来源。
The news comes from a reliable source.
这消息来自一位可靠人士。
The library has quantities of reference sources.
该图书馆藏有大量可供参考的原始资料。
8>A healthy diet should include a variety of food, most of which should be rich in nutrients.
include
variety
be rich in
[用法] 富于...的,有很多...的
[举例]The country is rich in resources.
这个国家资源丰富。
9>Vegans do not eat or use any animal products.
product
[用法]n.[C]产品,产物;产量;出产
[举例]They came here in search of new markets for their products.
他们来此为他们的产品寻找新市场。
Unit 14 Festivals
Part 1 Topic : Festivals
I （ Knowledge）
1. Can remember the following words and expressions (by pronunciation, spelling and writing):
theme, parade, holy, Easter, symbol, fighting, conflict, argument, opinion, destruction, major, probably, honour /honor(Am.E), ancestor, principle, nation, purpose, creativity, faith, commercial, joy, light (v.), similar, generation, salute, kiss, cheek, nod, celebration, respect, gift, cycle, fool, invitation, self-determination, reminder
dress up, in one’s opinion, play a trick on /play tricks on, take in, in common
2. Can use the following structures in different situations:
1) Useful expressions in the text
in my opinion, play a trick on /play tricks on, take in, in common, have something/nothing in common with …,as well as, get together.
2) Expressions on expressing and supporting an opinion
In my opinion, we should… I believe we should…
I don’t think it is necessary to… We must decide…
I hope we can make a decision. If we do this, we can…
3) Modal verbs (2): must, have to, have got to.
3. Can be familiar with the following world festivals and talk about them:
Chinese festivals: the Spring Festival, the Lantern Festival (Yuanxiao), Tomb Sweeping Festival (Qingming), Dragon Boat Festival (Duanwu), Mid-Autumn Festival, Double Ninth Festival (Chongyang), National Day, New Year’s Day, Chinese Youth Day, Party’s Day, Army’s Day, Teachers’ Day, Tree-planting Day…
Foreign festivals: Christmas, Halloween, Thanksgiving Day, Easter, Valentine’s Day, April Fool’s Day, Ramadan, Day of the Dead (from Mexico), Bon Odori Festival/ Ghost Festival (from Japan) (盂兰盆节), Mardi Gras, Kwanzaa…
4. Can read the reading materials correctly, including pronunciation, intonation, pause and fluency. And recite five to eight beautiful or important sentences.
5. Can understand the teaching material well, and retell the text and have a discussion according to the text after class.
6. Can get further information about festivals through classes, magazines, newspapers, related books, Internet and so on.
II ( Affect )
1. To get Ss to enjoy festivals and customs from different countries, and enlighten Ss to enjoy the beauty and the importance of festivals and customs.
2. To encourage Ss to show positive and healthy attitude towards festivals and customs from different countries.
3. To get Ss to know how to hold effective and successful festivals.
4. To get Ss to further understand the differences between Chinese and foreign cultures by comparing Chinese and foreign festivals and customs.
III 技能目标 ( Skills )
1. To train Ss’ four skills (listening, speaking, reading and writing) in different periods.
2. To make Ss’ know how to write an invitation in English.
3. To help Ss to develop the ability of learning English through different ways, such as reading newspapers, magazines and books, surf the Internet, etc.
Part 2 Pre-unit Activities: Preview Task
1. Find information about the following festivals as much as possible through newspapers, magazines, related books and Internet.
Chinese festivals: the Spring Festival, the Lantern Festival (Yuanxiao), Tomb Sweeping Festival (Qingming), Dragon Boat Festival (Duanwu), Mid-Autumn Festival, Double Ninth Festival (Chongyang), National Day, New Year’s Day, Chinese Youth Day, Party’s Day, Army’s Day, Teachers’ Day, Tree-planting Day…
Foreign festivals: Christmas, Halloween, Thanksgiving Day, Easter, Valentine’s Day, April Fool’s Day, Ramadan, Day of the Dead (from Mexico), Bon Odori Festival/ Ghost Festival (from Japan) (盂兰盆节), Mardi Gras, Kwanzaa…
2. Read the following introductions of some famous foreign festivals.
Mardi Gras The America's most favorite celebration, and famous Mardi Gras takes place in New Orleans, Louisiana. Carnival has religious roots associated with Judeo-Christian tradition. Mardi Gras is set to occur 46 days (the 40 days of Lent plus six Sundays) before Easter and can come as early as February 3 or as late as March 9. Known as the “biggest free show on earth”, people there dress up in costumes for these events and enjoy this celebration by going to public parades where they catch “beads, doubloons, cups, and trinkets” that are all thrown from floats. They also have private celebrations, masquerade balls, held by clubs called krewes. The official colors of Carnival are purple, green and gold, chosen in 1872 by that year's Rex. The colors have meaning: purple for justice, green for faith and gold for power. King Cakes are eaten during this holiday.
Valentine’s Day February 14th, Valentine’s Day, is sweethearts’ day, on which people in love with each other express their tender emotions. People sometimes put their love message in a heart-shaped box of chocolates, or a bunch of flowers tied with red ribbons. Words or letters may be written on the flower covered card, or something else. Whatever the form may be, the message is almost the same -“ Will you be my valentine?” The symbol of valentine is a picture with a Heart and Cupid armed with bow and arrow. Many universities, high or elementary schools hold a sweethearts’ Ball for the young students to celebrate Valentine’s Day.
Bon Odori Festival (Ghost Festival) Japanese has been looking upon Ghost Day Ceremony originating in Buddhist Ullambana. These two festivals were not only public holidays with enthusiastic festivities but also times when people gave presents to each other and enhance amity between them. The custom of giving presents might root in the transfer from the kind-heartedness of giving alms to the concern for the living families and friends. The Japanese also hang lanterns on July 15 to lead the spirits back to the earthly world and have them enjoy grand banquet. It is like our custom of releasing water lanterns and firing lanterns. Besides, they hold a “pot” ceremony, called “pot-reciting”, which praises Buddhist sutras, singing and dancing, receiving the departed spirits and sending away the solitary ghosts. Today, there are various scales of “pot ceremony” all over Japan, which is kind of an amusement gathering. However, current Ghost Day Ceremony is not full of gloomy atmosphere in its form, remaining only enjoyable sentiment in spite of the existing original meaning.
Halloween 1,000 years ago, the Celts living in the Great Britain believed that human is mastered by gods. They also believe that Samhain, the death god, would come back to the earthly world with the dead at the night on October 31. The Celts built bonfires and fired animals as sacrificial offerings to the death god. Some Celts were dressed in costumes made from animal heads or furs, which was the origin of contemporary Halloween masquerade. The night of the death god was a horrifying time that signified the coming of winter and was the beginning of Halloween eve. Today, the religious meaning of Halloween has been weakened; instead, the holiday expresses man’s cherishing memory of Halloween via innovative, ever-changing modern masquerade.
Day of the Dead, Mexico On November 2nd, each house roasts bread of animal forms, broiling chicken, hot chocolate and sweet corns, plus laying some toys on the altar because Mexicans believe that the dead children will come back to their own homes in the midnight. The altar for the dead elder is stocked with belongings of the merriment as they do; therefore, their Ghost Festival is just like a carnival when people walk around with masks, eating skull-shaped candies. And even a ghost image is put on the bread. In the evening, the whole family goes to the cemetery and clears the grave. Women praise all night in kneeling or sitting position while men are talking or singing. The flickering midnight candlelight is filling up the cemetery whereas walking singers are chanting for the dead Spirits.
Easter Easter, with its religious character, falls on the first Sunday after the full moon that occurs on or after March 21st. Therefore, Easter happens sometimes in March, and sometimes in April. It commemorates the resurrection of Jesus Christ from the tomb where he had lain for three days following his Crucifixion. His rise after three days indicates that he would accomplish his promise to rise again from the dead as proof of eternal life. As Christ’s return to life had occurred during the season of spring, some of the rites of Spring were still retained. Therefore, we see that although Easter is based on the events in the life of Christ, it has been influenced by older traditions. For example, the custom of dyeing eggs is still very popular among American children. Originally the egg symbolized fertility for the ancient Persians and Greeks who exchanged eggs at their spring festivals. But up to the Christian time, the egg symbolized the tomb from which Christ rose. For Christian lamb is the symbol of the sacrifice of Christ and pig the symbol of good luck. That is why both in Europe and in America, people have lamb and ham as their main meat on Easter Sunday. In all the spring season, people enjoy the Easter message of hope, joy and the resurrection of spirit.
Thanksgiving Day Thanksgiving Day, which originated in America and was first celebrated in 1621 by the pilgrims of the Plymouth Colony, is the most typical and true national holiday of all the holidays observed in the United States of America. Because of the religious persecution by the established church in England, the pilgrims left their native land with the purpose of enjoying religious freedom. They first fled to Holland, and then sailed to America on a ship called the Mayflower. When they arrived at Plymouth, Massachusetts, it was November, 1620. The first winter was very difficult for them and over half of them died because of hunger and illness, hard work and severely cold weather. In the spring of the next year, 1621, a friendly Indian named Squants, who had been captured and released by other English men, came to help them in planting the corn and fertilizing the soil. Then Squants brought the Indian chief called Massasoit who also treated them in a friendly way. With the help of the Indians, the pilgrims had a bumper harvest that year. They thought the harvest was a kind of deliverance by God, so they decided to have a day of celebration after their harvest to express their thanks to God. And they also invited the Indian chief Massasoit in gratitude and prepared a grand dinner out-doors. The celebration lasted for 3 days. On October 3rd, 1863, Lincoln issued the first National Thanksgiving Proclamation. Since then it has been the custom for the President of the United States to Proclaim annually the fourth Thursday of November as Thanksgiving Day. The Thanksgiving dinner is mainly stuffed with roast turkey, squash and corn, pumpkin pie and Indian pudding a custard made from corn), etc. Today, American people have four days for this holiday, although the first Thanksgiving lasted three days. One is probably surprised to find the uniformity in the holiday scene of every family, wherever one goes in the United States. People go back home to enjoy the reunion of their family at the arrival of Thanksgiving Day.
Christmas Christmas Day, which is the greatest of the Christian festivals, falls on December 25th on which Christian people believe Jesus Christ was born, although no one can tell the exact date of his birth. This is the biggest and best-loved holiday in the United States, which is full of joy and gaiety, love and laughter, hospitality and good will. People usually have two weeks for this holiday. They begin to prepare Christmas long before the holiday comes. Small families and large business firms prepare the holiday differently. Stores are decorated with the traditional Christmas colors of green and red. Goods associated with Christmas become best sellers at this time. People like to decorate their stores and homes with Christmas tree, which is usually covered with strings of colored lights and a star fixed on top representing the star in the East which guided the three Wise Men to where Jesus was born. And Christmas food is special: peppermint-flavored red and white striped canes of sugar, bright colored hard sweets, chocolate bonbons, creamy homemade fudge and clusters of chocolate-covered raisins, walnuts or pecans, etc. On Christmas Eve families have a big dinner. Children hang their stockings by the fireplace, hoping that Santa Claus will fill them with sweets and toys.
Part 3: While-unit Activities: Five Separate Periods
Period 1: Warming up & Listening
Before having this period, the Students (Ss) are asked to collect information about the three festivals: Halloween, Bon Odori Festival, Day of the Dead.
Step 1 Lead-in
1. First, greet Ss with the questions “How are you feeling today?” “ Do you feel happy today?”
Then, Teacher (T) can lead in the topic festival/ holiday by asking some questions such as:
When do you usually feel happy? (Ss can give different answers)
Do you feel happy when there is a festival and you have holidays?
Then which festival or holiday do you like best? And why?
2. Chinese have many festivals. How many Chinese festivals do you know? And what are they?
( the Spring Festival, the Lantern Festival (Yuanxiao), Tomb Sweeping Festival (Qingming), Dragon Boat Festival (Duanwu), Mid-Autumn Festival, Double Ninth Festival (Chongyang), National Day, New Year’s Day, Chinese Youth Day, Party’s Day, Army’s Day, Teachers’ Day, Tree-planting Day…)
Which is the greatest and the most important festival to our Chinese people? When do Chinese celebrate the Spring Festival? How long does the Spring Festival last? Why do Chinese people celebrate it? What is the theme of the Spring Festival? How is it celebrated?
3.Different cultures have different kinds of customs and festivals. How many foreign festivals do you know? And what are they?
( Christmas, Halloween, Thanksgiving Day, Easter, Valentine’s Day, April Fool’s Day, Ramadan, Day of the Dead (from Mexico), Bon Odori Festival/ Ghost Festival (from Japan) (盂兰盆节), Mardi Gras, Kwanzaa…)
Step 2 Warming up
1. Show the Ss three pictures and ask them to discuss in pairs according to the following guiding questions:
Q1: Do you know the names of the festivals? (Halloween, Bon Odori, Day of the Dead)
Q2: Do you know which countries the festivals come from?
Q3: What are the people in the pictures doing? Why are they doing this?
2. Ask individual students to talk about the three festivals. The information of the festivals should include the name of the festival, when, where and how to celebrate it.
3. Which Chinese festival is similar to the three festivals? (Tomb Sweeping Festival)
Then get Ss to compare the Chinese Tomb Sweeping Festival with one of the three festivals. (Differences: time, people, place, the way of celebrating, etc. Similarity: ghost festival)
Step 3 Dialogue
Get Ss to work in pairs to make up a dialogue. One describes his/her favorite Chinese festival and the other describes his/her favorite foreign festival. Trying to compare them.
(The following form is presented for Ss to prepare.)
Festival
When is the festival celebrated?
Who celebrates the festival?
How do people celebrate it?
Why do people celebrate it?
What are some important themes, e.g.“family” and “peace”?
How old is the festival?
Step 4 Listening
1. Pre-listening: Present three pictures about Mardi Gras, Ramadan and Easter and let Ss to guess out the names of the festivals from what they can see from the pictures.
2. While-listening: Do the three festivals one by one. For each one, Ss can listen to it twice. The first time, Ss’ task is to find correct answers to the choices in the book. The second time, Ss’ task is to check their answers and T check the correct answers with the whole class.
3. Post-listening: Get Ss to listen to each festival again. While listening, try to take notes and get more information about the festival. Then ask Ss to describe the three festivals in their own words.
Step 5 Summary
Help Ss to have a revision of the festivals learnt in this class.
T: Different histories and cultures have different kinds of festivals and customs. We should get to know they all play important parts in learning a country’s language. We should respect and show positive attitudes towards foreign festivals and customs as well as Chinese ones.
Step 6 Homework
1. Listening work: Listen to the listening material about Christmas in workbook on page 77.
2. Written work: Write a description of your favorite festival. The description should include 1) the name 2) the time 3) characteristics 4) activities, etc.
Period 2: Reading
Step 1 Revision
Get Ss to work in pairs to match the festivals in Column A with the information in Column B.
Column A Column B
1.Ramada A. celebrated on the 15th day of the first Chinese lunar month
2.the Lantern Festival B. chocolate, bunnies, colored eggs for its symbols
3.Mardi Gras C. Muslims fast during the daylight day
4.Dragon Boat Festival D. catching “beads, doubloons and cups” thrown by parades
5.Valentine’s Day E. honoring love and lovers
6.Halloween F. eating Zongzi to honor Qu Yuan
7.Double Ninth Festival G. the time of ghosts, spirits, gravestones
8.Thanksgiving Day H. meaning clear and bright, mourning the dead
9.Easter I. offering thanks, family gatherings and meals
10.Tomb Sweeping Festival J. on the 9th day of the 9th lunar month as Senior
citizen’s Day
Step 2 Pre-reading
1. Make a comparison of Chinese Spring Festival and Christian
Christmas.
T: Which is the greatest and the most important festival to Chinese people? (the Spring Festival) And which is the greatest and the most important festival to Christian people in western countries? (Christmas)
Both of them are quite popular in the world. What are the differences between them?
Festival
Different
aspects
Chinese Spring Festival
Christmas
Time From the 1st day to the 15th day of the first Chinese lunar month
On Dec. 25
Preparation Do spring cleaning, do Spring Festival shopping (new clothes, delicious food, fireworks, New Year paintings, etc.), decorate the houses with Spring Festival couplets, paper cuts, Chinese knots… Do cleaning, do Christmas shopping (gifts, cards, sweet, cookies, etc.), decorate the houses with Christmas tree and colored lights…
Special Food New Year’s cake, dumpling ( jiaozi) , sweet dumpling (tangyuan)…
Candies, cookies, pudding…
Gifts Anything (foods, fruits, clothes, drinks…) Anything (foods, fruits, drinks, desserts, Christmas decorations)
Major Activities Have family reunion dinner on New Year’s Eve, pay New Year’s visits, recreational activities (dragon dance, lion dance, stilt-walking…)
Family reunion, have a big dinner on Christmas Eve…
purpose Bidding farewell to the old year and welcoming the new year, hoping for the best and the good future.
Celebrating the birth of Jesus Christ
Note: The italicized words in the form above are suggested answers.
Step 3 Reading
T: Do you know there is another festival which follows Christmas Day in America. It is an important festival to African Americans. Is there any one who knows the name of the festival? (Kwanzaa)
1. Fast reading: Read the text on page 10 fast and try to get a general idea of Kwanzaa from the text. T can present a diagram of the information about Kwanzaa to help Ss to finish this task.
(Questionnaire: When is Kwanzaa celebrated? How long does it last?
Who created the festival of Kwanzaa? (Dr Maulana Karenga) Who usually celebrates Kwanzaa? Why is it celebrated? What are the characteristics of Kwanzaa?)
2. Careful reading: Get Ss to read the text carefully to get more details. After reading, Ss are asked to do True or False exercises.
1) African Americans have a long history and a rich culture, so Kwanzaa is an old festival. ( F ) (a young festival)
2) People created Kwanzaa to celebrate American culture. ( F ) ( to celebrate African culture)
3) The word Kwanzaa means first fruit in Swahili, one of the largest languages in Africa. ( T )
4) The African first-fruit festivals are completely different from each other. ( F ) ( to have many things in common )
5) Kwanzaa is celebrated on Christmas Day. ( F ) ( from Dec. 26 to Jan. 1 )
6) Kwanzaa is based on old African festivals. ( T )
7) People who celebrate Kwanzaa light a candle for each of the seven principles. ( T )
3. Dialogue.
Suppose you are the reporter of Overseas Wind Programme of Huipu Students’ Broadcasting. Now you are chosen to interview the foreign teacher John about the festival of Kwanzaa. Make up a dialogue with your partner. One acts the role of the reporter, and the other acts the role of John. The dialogue can begin like this:
Reporter (R): Good afternoon, everyone. Here is our Overseas Wind Programme. Today, we have a foreign guest in our progamme. He is our foreign teacher John. Hello, John.
John (J): Hello.
R: Welcome to our Overseas Wind Programme. Today we have a topic about the festival of Kwanzaa. So would you like to introduce Kwanzaa to us? …
J: …
Step 4 Discussion
Topic1: Do you agree festivals can help us understand our history and culture? How do they help us understand our history and culture?
Topic2: Nowadays more and more festivals have been created in my cities for various purposes, such as developing local economy, making the city well-known, etc. Our city Linhai created the Festival of the Great Wall in the South. It has been celebrated for three years. However, some Linhainese think holding such a festival causes some problems to the city. What effects does the Festival of the Great Wall in the South bring to us? Make a list
Good Effects Bad Effects
… …
Step 5 Homework
1. Oral Work: Read and recite the new words learnt in this class.
Read and recite some beautiful and useful sentences in the text.
2. Written Work: Suppose you are the journalist of Huipu Sunshine Magazine. You are going to write a passage about Kwanzaa.
Period 3 Language Study & Grammar
Step 1 Revision
Get Ss to have revision of the text The Birth of Kwanzaa. Ss are required to answer the following questions about Kwanzaa.
Q1: Who created Kwanzaa?
Q2: Is it a young or an old festival? When was it born?
Q3: When is Kwanzaa celebrated?
Q4: Who celebrate the festival of Kwanzaa?
Q5: Why is it celebrated?
Q6: What are the characteristics of Kwanzaa?
Then T can ask individual Ss to give a short talk about Kwanzaa according to the questions above.
Step 2 Language points (in the text The Birth of Kwanzaa)
T: Now we have a good knowledge of Kwanzaa by reading the text. And there are some useful and important words and expressions in the text as well. It is necessary for us to learn and master them well. What useful words and expressions have you found from the text?
1. Let Ss do a word matching exercise to check whether Ss master the new words well.
1. nation A. a strong wish to succeed in doing something
2. faith B. large community of people; country
3. determination C. belief in something or someone
4. purpose D. an action meant to deceive (欺骗) someone
5. generation E. a reason for doing something
6. ancestor F. the people born at a certain time
7. peace G. a person in your family who lived a long time ago
8. trick H. quietness and calm
(suggested answers:1-B 2-C 3-A 4-E 5-F 6-G 7-H 8-D )
Then check answers to the exercises in Word Study on Page 13.
(suggested answers: theme, faith, purpose, nations, determination, joy, ancestors, birth, peace, treated)
2. Deal with the language points in the text. Get Ss to enjoy the text by listening to the tape. Ask Ss to read after the tape in low voice, and pay attention to the pronunciation, intonation and pause while listening.
1) Kwanzaa is a seven-day festival celebrating the culture and history of African Americans.（现在分词作后置定语，表示名词中心词与分词是主动关系。）
Kwanzaa is a seven-day festival created to celebrate the culture and history of African Americans.（过去分词作后置定语，表示名词中心词与分词是被动关系。）
e.g.那只跟着王老师进来的狗是我家的狗。
The dog following Mr. Wang into the room is my dog.
被一群学生跟在后面的那个男人是我们的王老师。
The man followed by a group of students is our teacher, Mr. Wang.
2) The week following Christmas Day, many African-American families get together to greet the new year and think about the past.
get together: 聚会
e.g. On New Year’s Eve we Chinese get together for a family reunion dinner
get somebody together:把…聚集起来
e.g. Every Monday morning, our school leaders get all the students together to have a meeting.
get-together n.聚集
e.g. Every year my classmates in junior middle school have a get-together.
3)…so that… 表示目的
e.g. He works hard so that he can get high marks in the exam.
…so+adj.+that 从句
e.g. He works so hard that he gets high marks in the exam.
4) in common 共同
e.g. Mr. and Mrs. Li own the store in common.
have something/nothing in common (with sth.) （与…）有共同点
e.g. I have nothing in common with my sister.
5) honour (=honor Am.E) n./v.
n. [ C ] “ 荣幸，使感到光荣的人或事”, 一般用单数形式。
e.g. To host the 29th Olympic Games is a great honour for China.
v. Every year we honour our past relatives and ancestors before a memorial in Tomb Sweeping Festival.
I felt highly honoured when the teacher spoke highly of me before classmates.
in one’s honour; in honour of something/somebody.为了纪念、尊敬某人/某事
e.g. Dragon Boat Festival is created in honour of the famous poet Quyuan.
6) as well as 与…一样好， 不仅…而且
e.g. She cooks as well as her mother.
Christine can speak Japanese as well as English
His children as well as his well were invited to the party.
（A as well as B …谓语动词单复词由A决定）
7）nation, country, state 三者的区别
三个都有“国家”的意思，但侧重点不同。
nation着重指人民、民族、国民。
e.g. The whole nation was in deep sorrow at this bad news.
country着重指疆土、国土、家园，也可指一个人的祖国或国籍所在， 还可指乡村。e.g. The soldier fought bravely for their country.
state着重指政策、政权、政府和国家机器， 还可指组成国家的州，特别是美国。e.g. Highways in China belong to the state./ How many states are there in the United States of America.
8) purpose: with/ for the purpose of (doing) something 表目的
e.g. He went to the supermarket for the purpose of buying something to eat.
on purpose 故意地，特意地
e.g. I came here on purpose to see you .
9) faith: have/ lose faith in…对…有/失去信心
e.g. I have faith in you, you will do it well.
Keep/break faith with somebody 对…某人守/不守信用
e.g. We will not treat him as our friend as he breaks faith with us.
10) believe in … 信仰，信任，赞成
e.g. We believe in his good character.
11) light v. (lighted/ lighted; lit/ lit)
Step 4 Grammar
1. Presentation : Present a sign “No Rubbish”
Ask Ss “What can you see in the sign?” “What does the sign tell us?” “Can we throw rubbish in this place?”“Where must we throw the rubbish?” “What should we do if we cannot find a dustbin at once?”
T presents the following two sentences on the screen.
①We mustn’t throw the rubbish in the place with a sign“No Rubbish”, and we must throw the rubbish into the dustbin.
②We have to keep the rubbish in hand or in a plastic bag until we find a dustbin, if we cannot find a dustbin at once.
2. Get Ss to compare the two sentences above and explain how to use the modal verbs“must” & “have to”.
must is often used when you think that it is necessary to do something. have to is often used when someone else thinks it is necessary or there seems to be no other choice.
must is used to talk about an obligation that depends on the person speaking or listening, while have to is generally used to talk about obligations that come from “outside”.
must--subjective have to --objective
e.g. I must be back by ten every night.( I think it is necessary for me to be back by ten every night.)
I have to be back by ten every night. ( I don’t want to be back by ten every night, maybe my mother thinks it’s necessary.)
3. Tell Ss in informal English, “have got to” can be used instead of “have to”. e.g. It is getting late, I’m afraid I have got to (=have to) go.
4. Forms in tense & Negative form
forms in tense: must, must have to, had to
negative form:
must--must not(mustn’t)(=not be allowed=be forbidden)
have to -- do not have to (don’t have to)(=needn’t)
e.g. It is a secret, you mustn’t tell others.
It is none of your business, I don't have to tell you about this.
Step 5 Practice
1. Look at the following table of greeting manners. Decide which are necessary and which are not. Make sentences using must, have to or negative forms.
Greeting manners
get off the bike when you greet someone salute
bow kiss on the cheek
nod hug
smile look into the eyes
take off your hat shake hands
Example: When you greet a friend who you know very well, you don’t have to shake hands.
If you want to make friends with someone, you have to smile more often.
2. Suppose you are spending the Spring Festival at your grandparents’ house. Complete the sentences with have got to.
1) Your school starts tomorrow, so you have got to go back today.
2) You broke your grandma’s favourite vase, so
3) Your parents went back to work three days ago, so
4) Your grandparents have give you quite a lot of money, so
5) You have done your homework all wrong, so
6) You do not know when you should go to school tomorrow, so
7) _______________________, so ______________________
8) ______________________, so________________________
Step 6 Discussion
Ask Ss to have a discussion of Dos and Don'ts at school, using the modal verbs: must & have to
Dos Don’ts
We must keep the classroom clean. We mustn’t jump the queue in the dining
hall.
We have to wear school uniforms We don’t have to use credit card in the every day. school store.
… …
Step 7 Homework
1. Make sentences with the following expressions: get together, in common, honour (v./n.), as well as, with/for the purpose of (doing) sth., have/lose faith in …
2. Finish off the grammar exercises in Workbook
3. Collect information about Earth Day, Martin Luther King, Jr Day, Day of the Dead, and April Fool’s Day.
Period 4 Speaking & Integrating Skills
Step 1 Lead in
In this unit, we have learnt a variety of festivals in the world, and as we know all of them celebrate different things, so their themes are quite different. What themes of the festivals do you know? ( peace, family, environment, nature, memory of great men, etc.)
Step 2 Reading (Integrating skills)
1. Get Ss to read the four festivals Earth Day, Martin Luther King, Jr Day, Day of the Dead, and April Fool’s Day, and try to get information about each one as much as possible.
2. Ask Ss following questions about each festival.
(Earth Day): When is Earth Day celebrated? What does it celebrate?
What does it tell us? What could we do to celebrate Earth Day?
(Martin Luther King, Jr Day): When is Martin Luther King, Jr Day celebrated? When did it become a national holiday? What is the theme of the 2002 holiday? What do you think “A Day On, Not A Day Off!” means? Martin Luther King, Jr Day is created in honour of Martin Luther King, are there any other great men or women whose memory should be celebrated? How would you celebrate the memory of them?
(Day of the Dead):Is it an old festival? What does it come from? What’s the theme of Day of the Dead? What do people do on that day? Why do so many festivals honour our ancestor?
(April Fool’s Day): What do people do on April Fool’s Day? Have you ever heard of an April Fool’s trick? What happened? What do we call the person who is taken in?
Step 3 Speaking
Suppose our country is going to create a new holiday, and there are four choices. They are Peace Day, Happiness Day, Friendship Day, and Nature Day. What Day of the four days do you think is the best one?
Fist, get Ss to discuss in pairs.
Then, ask individual Ss to report their decision using the following structures:
I think that the new holiday should be________. On this day, ________are allowed. People will __________. The holiday will be celebrated on _________and people will celebrate by______________. I think this is the best idea because___________.
Step 4 Tasks
Task 1: Design your new favourite holiday or festival and give reasons.
Report your new holiday or festival, using the following expressions:
In my opinion, we should… I believe we should…
I don’t think it is necessary to… We must decide…
I hope we can make a decision. If we do this, we can…
Task 2: Create your own festival. Get Ss to write a short description of their created festival according to the form below.
Name of the festival: ________________________________
Date: __________________________________________
Meaning: _________________________________________
Principles: __________________________________________
How is the festival celebrated? ___________________________
What is the symbol of the festival? _______________________
Step 5 Writing
T: Now you have created your new festival, you may want your friends to join the celebration of your new festival. So you should invite your friends to attend your celebration activity. Then how will you invite your friends? Here an invitation is needed.
T can present a sample of invitation and tell Ss how to write an invitation. Information needed in an invitation should include: what, when, who, why, and where? (see tips on page14)
(Sample:
Dear Mr. and Mrs. Silver,
We are having a small At-home party with a few close friends at our house on Tuesday, February 3rd, at 7:00 o’clock.
We should be very pleased if you could honour us with your company.
Sincerely yours,
John Brown)
Step 6 Homework
1. Writing: Use the information about the festival you have created to write an invitation. Your invitation letter should explain your festival and tell the guest how it will be celebrated.
2. Finish off all the exercises in Workbook.
Unit 15 The necklace
Ⅰ.Teaching Goals:
1.Talk about drama and theatre.
2.Use the modal verbs:must,can/could,may/might
(1)ask for permission;(2)ask about possibilities
3.Write and act a simple play.
Ⅱ.Teaching Time:
Five periods
Ⅲ.Background Information：
1.About the Author
Guy de Maupassant,the well-known French shortstory writer and novelist,was born on August 5,1850.When he was young,he had a great interest in literature.He practised writing literary works under the guidance of the famous novelist Flaubert.And Balzac was another teacher of his.So he wrote in the tradition of 19th century French realism,and became one of the most famous French critical realists of the late 19th century.
Maupassant's stories were built around the everyday life of the simple humble people.He had a fine use of irony.His style was direct and simple,with attention to realistic details.He saw clearly the toil,sufferings and the bitterly ironic happenings in human lives.At his best,he was able to put into a few pages a life story which would take other writers a whole volume to describe.
Most of Maupassant's works are about the peasant life in Normandy,the France-Prussian War and the life of the petty bourgeoisie.As he had held a number of government positions in Parice since 1871,he became familiar with the life of the government workers.And this experience helped him create his best short story“The Diamond Necklace”,from which our present text is adapted.Almost a hundred years after its first publication the story still touches the readers deeply to their hearts.
Maupassant suffered a great deal from illness in his late life.Yet he struggled to continue writing with tremendous will power.He had but a short life,and died at the age of 43(on July 6,1893).
2.About the Text
This short play is a stage version of The Necklace,one of Maupassant's best-known short stories.It tells about a vain woman,wife of a small clerk,who borrowed a diamond necklace to go to the palace ball.But unfortunately she lost the necklace.Then she and her husband had to work ten long years to pay for it.
The heroine was named Mathilde,who used to be a pretty girl.Being born in a clerk's family,she had no hope of marrying a man of wealth and position.So she let herself be married to Pierre Loisel,a small clerk in a government office.They were not rich and lived a simple life.
One evening her husband brought home an invitation for the palace ball.It was the first time in their lives that they had been invited to an important occasion like this.But the wife did not feel happy at all,because she had no dress for the ball.As the ball was very important to Pierre,he decided to buy her a new dress,which cost about four hundred francs.That was all he had saved.But Mathilde had no jewellery and she didn't want to go to the palace without jewelley.Her husband suggested that she should go and borrow some jewellery from a rich friend of hers,Jeanne Forrestier.Jeanne was very kind and friendly.She brought out her jewelry for Mathilde to choose from.Mathilde borrowed a diamond necklace.
Mathilde was the prettiest woman that night at the palace.She was a great success.All the men wished to dance with her.She danced madly,forgetting herself,her husband,her home and all.
On the way home Mathilde found that the necklace was gone.She and her husband returned to the palace and looked for it in every room but couldn't find it,and they never saw it again.They had to borrow thirty-six thousand francs,buy a diamond necklace exactly like the one they had lost and return it to Jeanne.Then they worked hard for ten years to pay for the money.
At the end of ten hard years,Mathilde had changed a great deal and looked so old that Jeanne couldn't recognize her when they met in a park one day.When Jeanne heard Mathilde's story,she was amazed.She told Mathilde that the necklace she had lent her ten years before was made of glass.It was worth five hundred francs at the most.
The First Period
Teaching Aims:
1.Learn and master the following words:
footprint shoeprint fingerprint tire mystery mysterious scary dormitory
2.Do some listening.
3.Do some speaking by acting out some short plays.
Teaching Important Points:
1.Do listening and speaking practice.
2.Improve the students' listening ability.
3.Improve the students speaking ability by acting out some short plays in English.
Teaching Difficult Points:
1.How to finish the task of speaking.
2.How to make up short plays.
Teaching Methods:
1.Warming up to arouse the students' interest in creating good stories.
2.Listening-and-choosing activity to help the students go through with the listening material and understand it.
3.Making and acting out simple plays to practise the students' speaking ability.
4.Individual,pair or group work to make every student work in class.
Teaching Aids:
1.a tape recorder
2.a slide projector
3.a computer for multimedia use
Teaching Procedures:
Step Ⅰ. Greetings
Greet the whole class as usual.
Step Ⅱ. Lead-in
T:Have you read thrilling and exciting stories?
S1:Yes,I've read one.It is Huckleberry Finn.It was written by Mark Twain.It tells us something about a boy who met with much danger and trouble.
T:Have you seen the soul-stirring film?
S2:Yes.I have seen the film“Titanic”.It tells us that the largest and finest ship at that time sank because it hit an iceberg.It is terrible to see the ship sink under the sea.
T:I think most of you have seen the film.It is really a good and soul-stirring film.It won its Oscar.It is well worth seeing.OK.Which of you had adventurous experience?
S3:I had one.
T:Would you like to tell us your experience?
S3:I'd love to.One afternoon when I went home after school,I found our door open.Suddenly I felt something happen.It was a thief who broke into my house.I was about to leave for help when the thief saw me,He tied me to a chair and took away our money and some valuable things.It took me an hour to untie the rope and call the police.
T:What an advanture experience!Sometimes,all of us are likely to be in trouble.What should we do when we get into trouble?Now we'll have a discussion in pairs.Begin,please.
(After two minutes,teacher collects some advice from the students and shows them on the screen.)
Dos
Find a good chance to get rid of dangerous situation
Call 110 for help.
Ask neighbours for help.
Use your clever head to defeat the other.
…
Don'ts
Don't enter the dangerous situation.
Don't fight with him,for you are weak.
…
T:Your advice is very good.
Step Ⅲ. Warming up
T:Today a foreign senior boy and a Chinese senior girl are travelling on a small island.They have adventurous experience.Now open your books and look at the pictures in Unit 15.Make up a story about something happening to the boy and the girl.Prepare it in four groups.
(Teacher gives students enough time to prepare it.Then ask one group to read the story.)
T:(After some minutes.)Are you ready?Now I'll ask one group to read the story to the whole class.Which group will try?
Group 2:A foreign senior boy and a Chinese senior girl were travelling on a small island when they met an old wise man with long beard.They talked with the man,who had a map in his hand.He told them there were valuables in a certain castle according to the map.So the boy and the girl came to a secret chambers in a mysterious castle on the island and they found a box full of jewellery.They were very excited.And they were thinking about what to do when a huge monster appeared.The monster was angry with them and began to run after them.They were frightened and ran quickly.But the monster went on running after them and they couldn't get away from the monster.At that time the wise old man suddenly appeared before them and helped them leave the dangerous situation.At last he told them that everyone liked treasures.But only when we worked hard by hand to get treature could we own them.
T:Thank you for your story.
Step Ⅳ. Listening
T:Now let's do some listening.Listen to a short play on the tape.The play has three scenes.There are two questions for each scene.First we'll learn some new words on the blackboard.(Write the words“footprints,shoeprints,fingerprints”on the blackboard.)We have known“print”means“a mark mad e on a surface showing the shape pattern of a thing”.Can you guess the meaning of the words?
S4:I'll try.I think“footprint”is a mark made by the foot of a person or an animal.
S5:I think“shoeprint”is a mark made by a sole of a shoe.
S6:“fingerprint”is a mark or pattern of lines made by the end of a finger.
T:(Teacher shows some pictures on the screen.)
Yes.You are right.Look at the pictures.(Teacher points at them.)This is a footprint.This is a shoeprint and this is a fingerprint.
footprint shoeprint fingerprint
(Teacher writes the words“tire,mystery”on the blackboard and explain them.)
T:Now look at your books on Page 11 and go through the information and make sure you know what you must do before listening.
(After a while.)
T:Now,do you know what you should do after you listen to the tape?
Ss:Yes.
T:I'll play the tape three times.For the first time
★ 初一英语教学计划
★ 高一英语教学计划
★ 英语教学计划
【Unit 22 重、难点的讲解(人教版高一英语下册教案教学设计)（精选19篇）】相关文章：
五年级下册 Unit3 M Birthda 第三课时教案2022-10-30
八年级物理下册教学教师工作计划2022-09-17
高一英语下册教学计划2024-01-03
高三英语教师学期工作计划2022-09-03
人教PEP版三年级英语下册Recycle 2单元教案2023-06-20
人教新起点一年级英语下册Unit 16的教案2023-01-04
六年级下册英语计划-英语教学计划2023-02-21
新版PEP六年级英语教学计划2023-06-01
Unit 18 必会习语(人教版高一英语下册教案教学设计)2023-07-02
高二教学计划2022-09-19